Operating Instructions

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Operating Instructions"

Transcription

1 Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System ntegration \ Services Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor / EN

2 SEW-EURODRVE Driving the world

3 Contents Contents 1 General nformation How to use the operating instructions Structure of the safety notes Right to claim under limited warranty Exclusion of liability Copyright notice Safety Notes General Target group Designated use Other applicable documentation Transportation, storage nstallation Electrical connection Safe disconnection Operation Unit Structure MOVMOT inverter AS-nterface option Unit designations Mechanical nstallation MOVMOT gearmotor MLU13A option MNF21A option (in preparation) URM/BEM option nstalling the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor Tightening torques Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options Connection of MOVMOT MM../AVSK (connection option A) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZSK (connection option B) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZSK (connection option C) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZZK (connection option D1 / D2) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZZK (connection option D3 / D4) Connection between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the motor Connecting the MOVMOT options Connecting the DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) PC connection Startup nstructions Overview mportant notes on startup

4 Contents 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode mportant notes on startup Description of the controls Description of the DP switches S Description of DP switches S Selectable additional functions of MM..D Startup procedure Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode mportant notes on startup MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters Startup by transferring the set of parameters Parameter list Parameter description MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave mportant notes on startup MLK31A double slave functional description Description of the controls Description of the DP switches S Description of DP switches S Startup procedure Function modules MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters Startup by transferring the parameter set Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Parameter list Parameter description Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor Operation Operating display Drive D module MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Service Status and error display Diagnostics with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Unit replacement SEW Service Extended storage Disposal Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

5 Contents 12 Technical Data Motor with operating point 4 V / 5 Hz or 4 V / 1 Hz Motor with operating point 46 V / 6 Hz Motor with operating point 23 V / 5 Hz AS-nterface technical data Technical data of options Work done, working air gap and braking torque of the brake Braking torque assignment Diagnostics interface Assignment of internal braking resistors Assignment of external braking resistors Resistance and assignment of the brake coil Assignment of the Drive-D module Declaration of Conformity Address List ndex Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 5

6 1 General nformation How to use the operating instructions 1 General nformation 1.1 How to use the operating instructions The operating instructions are an integral part of the product and contain important information for operation and service. The operating instructions are written for all employees who assemble, install, startup, and service this product. The operating instructions must be legible and accessible at all times. Make sure that staff responsible for the plant and its operation, as well as persons who work independently on the unit, have read the operating instructions carefully and understood them. f you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation, or if you require further information, contact SEW-EURODRVE. 1.2 Structure of the safety notes The safety notes in these operating instructions are designed as follows: Pictogram SGNAL WORD Type and source of danger. Possible consequence(s) if disregarded. Measure(s) to prevent the danger. Pictogram Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded Example: DANGER mminent danger Severe or fatal injuries General danger WARNNG Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries CAUTON Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries Specific danger, e.g. electric shock NOTCE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its environment NFORMA- TON Useful information or tip. Simplifies the handling of the drive system. 6 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

7 General nformation Right to claim under limited warranty Right to claim under limited warranty A requirement of fault-free operation and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty is that you adhere to the information in the operating instructions. Therefore, read the operating instructions before you start working with the unit. Make sure that the operating instructions are available to persons responsible for the plant and its operation, as well as to person who work independently on the unit. You must also ensure that the documentation is legible. 1.4 Exclusion of liability You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to ensure safe operation of the MOVMOT MM..D inverter and to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRVE does not assume liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of these operating instructions. n such cases, any liability for defects is excluded. 1.5 Copyright notice 29 SEW-EURODRVE. All rights reserved. Unauthorized reproduction, copying, distribution or any other use of the whole or any part of this documentation is strictly prohibited. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 7

8 2 Safety Notes General 2 Safety Notes The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the plant and its operation, as well as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. f you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation, please contact SEW-EURODRVE. 2.1 General Never install or start up damaged products. Submit a complaint to the shipping company immediately in the event of damage. During operation, MOVMOT drives can have live, bare and movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure. Removing covers without authorization, improper use as well as incorrect installation or operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to property. Refer to the documentation for additional information. 2.2 Target group Only qualified electricians are authorized to install, startup or service the units or correct unit errors (observing EC 6364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DN VDE 1 and EC 6664 or DN VDE 11 as well as national accident prevention guidelines). Qualified personnel in the context of these basic safety notes are persons familiar with installation, assembly, startup and operation of the product who possess the necessary qualifications. Any activities regarding transportation, storage, operation, and disposal must be carried out by persons who have been instructed appropriately. 2.3 Designated use MOVMOT inverters are components intended for installation in electrical systems or machines. n case of installation in machines, startup of the MOVMOT inverters (i.e. start of designated operation) is prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in the EC Directive 26/42/EC (machine guideline). Startup (i.e. the start of designated use) is only permitted under observance of the EMC directive 24/18/EC. MOVMOT inverters comply with the regulations of the Low Voltage Directive 26/95/ EC. The standards given in the declaration of conformity are used for the MOVMOT inverter. You must observe the technical data and information on the connection requirements as provided on the nameplate and in the documentation Safety functions The MOVMOT inverter may not perform safety functions unless these functions are described and expressly permitted. 8 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

9 Safety Notes Other applicable documentation Hoist applications You have to observe the specific configuration and the settings for hoist applications for MOVMOT inverters to be used in hoist applications. MOVMOT inverters may not be used as a safety device in hoist applications. 2.4 Other applicable documentation Note also the following documentation: "DR , 315 AC Motors" operating instructions 2.5 Transportation, storage You must observe the notes on transportation, storage and proper handling. Comply with the requirements for climatic conditions stated in section "Technical Data". Tighten installed eyebolts securely. They are designed for the weight of the MOVMOT drive. Do not attach any additional loads. Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment (e.g. rope guides) if required. 2.6 nstallation The units must be installed and cooled according to the regulations and specifications in the corresponding documentation. Protect the MOVMOT inverters from improper strain. The following applications are prohibited unless the unit is explicitly designed for such use: Use in potentially explosive atmospheres. Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, radiation, etc. Use in non-stationary applications with strong mechanical oscillation and impact loads; see section "Technical Data". Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 9

10 2 Safety Notes Electrical connection 2.7 Electrical connection Observe the applicable national accident prevention guidelines when working on live MOVMOT drive inverters (e.g. BGV A3). Perform electrical installation according to the pertinent regulations (e.g. cable cross sections, fusing, protective conductor connection). For any additional information, refer to the applicable documentation. You will find notes on EMC-compliant installation, such as shielding, grounding, arrangement of filters and routing of lines, in the documentation of the MOVMOT inverter. The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for maintaining the limits established by EMC legislation. Protective measures and protection devices must comply with the regulations in force (e.g. EN 624 or EN ). A voltage test according to EN :27 chapter is required for the MOVMOT drives prior to startup in order to ensure the insulation. 2.8 Safe disconnection MOVMOT inverters meet all requirements for safe disconnection of power and electronic connections in accordance with EN All connected circuits must also satisfy the requirements for safe disconnection. 2.9 Operation Systems with integrated MOVMOT inverters must be equipped with additional monitoring and protection devices according to the applicable safety guidelines, such as the law governing technical equipment, accident prevention regulations, etc. Additional protective measures may be necessary for applications with increased potential risk. Do not touch live components and power connections immediately after separation of the MOVMOT inverter from the supply voltage because there may still be some charged capacitors. Wait at least for 1 minute after having switched off the supply voltage. As soon as supply voltages are present at the MOVMOT inverter, the terminal box must be closed (i.e. the MOVMOT inverter and, if applicable, the connector of the hybrid cable must be connected). The fact that the status LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated does not indicate that the unit has been disconnected from the supply system and no longer carries any voltage. Mechanical blocking or internal safety functions of the unit can cause a motor standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in the drive restarting automatically. f, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the driven machine, disconnect the unit from the supply system before correcting the error. Caution: Danger of burns: The surface temperature of the MOVMOT drive and of external options, e.g. the heat sink of the braking resistor, can exceed 6 C during operation! 1 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

11 Unit Structure MOVMOT inverter 3 3 Unit Structure 3.1 MOVMOT inverter The following figure shows the terminal box and the bottom of the MOVMOT inverter: [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [6] [7] [8] [9] [1] [11] [12] [13] [14] [8] [6] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [2] [21] [22] [1] S5 switch (to set the supply to AUX-PWR or AS-nterface data cable) Setting options see section "Setting the 24 V supply at the S5 switch" (page 78) [2] Connection box [3] X1: Plug connector for BEM option [4] Plug connector connection unit for MOVMOT inverter [5] MOVMOT inverter with heat sink [6] Cable glands [7] MLK3.A option with connection unit [8] Screw for PE connection [9] AS-nterface option nameplate [1] X6: Electronics terminal strip [11] X5, Electronics terminal strip [12] X1: Connection for brake coil (motors with brake) or braking resistor (motors without brake) [13] X1: Mains connection L1, L2, L3 [14] Connection type identification [15] AS-nterface connection [16] Drive-D module [17] nverter nameplate [18] Setpoint switch f2 (green) [19] DP switches S2/5 S2/8 [2] Switch t1 for integrator ramp (white) [21] DP switches S1/1 S1/8 [22] DP switches S2/1 S2/ Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 11

12 3 Unit Structure MOVMOT inverter The following figure shows a MOVMOT inverter with terminal box: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] Setpoint potentiometer f1 with screw plug [2] X5: Diagnostics interface with screw plug [3] Unit identification [4] nverter status LED [5] AS-nterface LED 12 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

13 Unit Structure AS-nterface option AS-nterface option The AS-nterface option is located on the connection board in the terminal box, see following picture: [1] [2] [3] [1] MOVMOT inverter [2] Connection board with AS-nterface option [3] Connection box The MOVMOT drive is available with the following AS-nterface designs: MLK3A binary slave MLK31A double slave for drive with several speed setpoints and ramps Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 13

14 3 Unit Structure AS-nterface option The following figure shows the topology and the travel diagrams of the MOVMOT drive with the MLK3A [A] and MLK31A [B] AS-nterface slaves: MLK3A MLK31A [1] MOVMOT MOVMOT [2] [2] V A V B t t [A] [B] MOVMOT drive with MLK3A binary slave MOVMOT drive with MLK31A double slave Drive with several speed setpoints and ramps [1] Supply system [2] Sensors MLK3A binary slave Connected to the AS-nterface, the MLK3A slave works like a module with 4 inputs and 4 outputs. The cyclic output bits control the MOVMOT inverter. The input bits transmit the status of the drive and 2 additional sensor signals to the AS- nterface master. The acyclic parameter bits are used to select speed scaling factors. The MLK3A option is compatible with MOVMOT MM..C with integrated AS-nterface MLK31A double slave The MLK31A option works as a double slave on the AS-nterface according to the AS- nterface specification 3.. The serial AS-nterface data transmission (analog profile) allows for MOVMOT parameters and display values to be written and read. The MOVMOT inverter is controlled via the cyclic output bits. The coding of the data bits is specified in different function modules. The MOVMOT inverter interprets these bits as different control and status codes. With the acyclic parameter bits, you can switch between the function modules. The input bits transmit the status of the drive and 2 additional sensor signals to the AS- nterface master. 14 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

15 Unit Structure Unit designations Unit designations Sample motor nameplate Bruchsal/Germany RF47DRE9L4BE2/MM15/MO/AVSK C V 38-5 Hz 5-6 A 3.5 so.kl. 155(F) kw 1.5 Hz 5 r/min 14/86 CT 1:5 TEFC Nm 166 P 54 M.L. 2 M M1 kg 31 3~ V BR Nm 13 kw 1.5 Hz 5 eff % CLP CC VGB22.65 Made in Germany RF 47 DRE 9L4 BE2/MM15/MO/AVSK Plug connector for AS-nterface Additional feature: inverter 1) e.g. MLK3A MOVMOT inverter Optional design motor (brake) Size, number of poles on motor Motor series Gear unit size Gear unit series 1) The nameplate only displays options installed at the factory. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 15

16 3 Unit Structure Unit designations Sample inverter nameplate Status: A / Typ MM15D-53- Sach.Nr Eingang / nput Serien Nr Ausgang / Output U= 3x38...5V AC U= 3xV...U nput D Bruchsal f= 5...6Hz f= Hz Made in Germany = 3.5A AC = 4.A AC MOVMOT T= C Antriebsumrichter P-Motor 1.5kW / 2.HP Drive nverter P-Motor (S3/25%): 2.2kW / 3.3HP Use 6/75 C copper wire only. Tighten terminals to 13,3in. - ibs.(1.5 Nm) Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5ms MM 15 D 53 N2936 CH1 Design ( = Standard) Connection type (3 = 3-phase) Supply voltage (5 = AC 38 5 V) (23 = AC 2 24 V) Version D Motor power (15 = 1.5 kw) MOVMOT series Unit identification The unit identification [1] on the top of the MOVMOT inverter provides information about the inverter type [2], inverter part number [3], unit power [4]. [2] [3] [4] [1] AS-nterface option nameplate (example) [1] [2] [3] [1] AS-interface option unit designation [2] Part number [3] Connection type identification 16 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

17 Unit Structure Unit designations Design for "Mounting close to the motor" The following illustration shows an example of the MOVMOT inverter mounted close to the motor with corresponding nameplate and unit designation: MM3D-53-//P22A/RR4A/AVSK/APG4/MLK MM3D-53-//P22A/RR4A/AVSK/APG4/MLK Additional feature: inverter 1) Plug connector for the connection to the motor Plug connector option Terminal box design Adapter for mounting close to the motor 21 = Size 1 22 = Size 2 Connection type = 1 = 1) The nameplate only displays options installed at the factory. MOVMOT inverter Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 17

18 4 Mechanical nstallation MOVMOT gearmotor 4 Mechanical nstallation 4.1 MOVMOT gearmotor Before you start Only install the MOVMOT drive if: The entries on the nameplate of the drive match the voltage supply system. The drive is undamaged (no damage caused by transportation or storage). You are certain that the following requirements have been fulfilled: Ambient temperature corresponds to the specifications in section "Technical Data". Note that the temperature range of the gear unit may also be restricted (see gear unit operating instructions). No oil, acid, gas, vapors, radiation, etc. nstallation tolerances The following tables shows the permitted tolerances of the shaft ends and flanges of the MOVMOT drive. Shaft end Diameter tolerance according to EN 5347 SO j6 with Ø 26 mm SO k6 with Ø 38 mm up to 48 mm SO m6 at Ø 55 mm Center bore in accordance with DN 332, shape DR.. Flanges Centering shoulder tolerance in accordance with EN 5347 SO j6 with Ø 25 mm SO h6 with Ø 3 mm 18 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

19 Mechanical nstallation MOVMOT gearmotor nstalling MOVMOT Observe the following notes for mounting the MOVMOT drive: nstall/mount the MOVMOT drive only in the mounting position specified on the motor nameplate on a level, vibration-free, and torsionally rigid support structure. Clean the output shafts thoroughly to ensure they are free of anti-corrosion agents (use a commercially available solvent). Do not allow the solvent to penetrate the bearings and shaft seals this could damage the material. Carefully align the MOVMOT inverter and the motor, to avoid placing any unacceptable strain on the motor shafts (observe permissible overhung load and axial load data!). Do not butt or hammer the shaft end. Use an appropriate cover to prevent objects or fluids from entering motors in vertical mounting positions. Ensure there is sufficient clearance around the unit to allow for adequate cooling. Furthermore, the unit must be positioned in such a way that it does not reuse the air warmed by other devices. Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (output shafts are balanced with a half key). Existing condensation drain holes must be sealed with plastic plugs. They must not be opened unless needed. Open condensation drain holes are not permitted. f condensation drain holes are open, higher enclosures are no longer possible. NOTCE The degree of protection specified in the technical data only applies if the MOVMOT inverter is properly installed. When the MOVMOT inverter is removed from the connection box, it might be damaged by humidity or dust. Protect the MOVMOT inverter when it is removed from the connection box nstallation in damp locations or in the open Observe the following notes for mounting the MOVMOT drive in damp areas or in the open: Use suitable cable glands for the supply leads (use reducing adapters if necessary). Coat the threads of cable glands and filler plugs with sealing compound and tighten them well; then coat them again. Seal the cable entries well. Clean the sealing faces of the MOVMOT inverter well before re-assembly. f the corrosion protection coating is damaged, restore the coating. Check enclosure according to nameplate. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 19

20 4 Mechanical nstallation MLU13A option 4.2 MLU13A option Option MLU13A is generally installed in the modular terminal box at the factory. f you have any questions about retrofitting the option, do not hesitate to contact the SEW-EURODRVE service. NOTCE Only install this option in combination with the modular terminal box of MOVMOT MM3D-53- MM4D-53-. The following figure depicts an installation example. n general, the installation depends on the used terminal box and on other installed options, if there are any For more information about connecting the MLU13A option, refer to section "Connection of option MLU13A" (page 45). 2 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

21 Mechanical nstallation MNF21A option (in preparation) MNF21A option (in preparation) Option MNF21A is generally installed in the modular connection box at the factory. f you have any questions about retrofitting the option, do not hesitate to contact the SEW-EURODRVE service. NOTCE Only install this option in combination with the modular terminal box of MOVMOT MM3D-53- MM15D-53-. The following figure depicts an installation example. n general, the installation depends on the used terminal box and on other installed options, if there are any For more information about connecting the MNF21A option, refer to section "Connecting the MNF21A option" (page 46). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 21

22 4 Mechanical nstallation URM/BEM option 4.4 URM/BEM option The URM and BEM options are generally installed in the terminal box at the factory. f you have any questions about retrofitting options URM or BEM, do not hesitate to contact the SEW-EURODRVE service. nstall the URM/BEM option using two screws according to the following figure: For more information about connecting the URM option, refer to section "Connection of option URM" (page 47). For more information about connecting the BEM option, refer to section "Connection of option BEM" (page 48). 22 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

23 Mechanical nstallation nstalling the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor nstalling the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor The following figure shows the mounting dimensions for installing the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor: M6 A B M6 Size Type A B / 2L MM3D53- MM15D-53- MM3D233- MM7D-233- MM22D53- MM4D-53- MM11D233- MM22D mm 65 mm 17 mm 65 mm Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 23

24 4 Mechanical nstallation Tightening torques 4.6 Tightening torques MOVMOT inverter Tighten the screws on the MOVMOT inverter using 3. Nm (27 lb.in) working diagonally across Screw plugs Tighten screw plugs of potentiometer f1 and connection X5 using 2.5 Nm (22 lb.in) Cable glands t is essential to observe the manufacturer's specifications for the cable glands Blanking plug cable entries Tighten blanking plug screws with 2.5 Nm (22 lb.in) Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

25 Mechanical nstallation Tightening torques Modular terminal box For fastening the terminal box on the mounting plate, tighten screws using 3.3 Nm (29 lb.in) Tightening torques for terminals Use the following tightening torques for terminals during installation: [1] [2] [3] [3] [1] [2] [3],8 1,5 Nm (7 13 lb.in) 1,2 1,6 Nm (11 14 lb.in) Nm (18 21 lb.in) URM / BEM / MNF21A / MLU13A options For installing options URM, BEM, MNF21A and MLU13A in the connection box, tighten screws using 2. (18 lb.in). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 25

26 5 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions 5 Electrical nstallation 5.1 nstallation instructions Connecting supply system leads The rated voltage and frequency of the MOVMOT inverter must correspond to the data for the power supply system. Cable cross section: according to input current mains for rated power (see section "Technical Data"). Permitted line cross section of MOVMOT terminals: Field wiring power terminals 24 V AUX PWR terminals ("24V" / " ") 1. mm 2-4. mm 2 (2 x 4. mm 2 ).2 mm mm 2 AWG17 AWG12 (2 x AWG12) AWG24 AWG14 For single assignment: Only connect single-wire conductors or flexible conductors with conductor end sleeve (DN part 1, material E-CU) with or without insulating shrouds For double assignment: Only connect flexible conductors with conductor end sleeve (DN part 1, material E-CU) without insulating shrouds Single-wire conductor (bare wire) Control terminals Flexible conductor Conductor with Conductor with (bare litz wire) Conductor end sleeve Conductor end sleeve without insulating with insulating shrouds shrouds.5 mm 2 1. mm 2.5 mm 2.75 mm 2 AWG2 AWG17 AWG2 AWG19 Only connect single-wire conductors or flexible conductors with or without conductor end sleeve (DN part 1, material E-CU) Permitted length of the conductor end sleeve: at least 8 mm nstall line fuses at the beginning of the power supply cable behind supply bus junction, see section "Connection of MOVMOT MM../AVSK", F11/F12/F13. Use only D, D or NH fuses, or circuit breakers for F11, F12, F13. Select the fuse size according to the cable cross section. SEW-EURODRVE recommends using earth-leakage monitors with pulse code measuring in voltage supply systems with a non-grounded star point (T systems). Using such devices prevents the earth-leakage monitor mis-tripping due to the ground capacitance of the inverter. 26 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

27 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions Activating control terminals X6:1 X6:8 Connecting the conductor without pushing the activation button Connecting the conductor after pressing the activation button Single-wire conductors and flexible conductors with conductor end sleeves can be installed directly (without tool) up to two cross-section sizes below the rated cross-section You will need to press the activation button on top to open the clamping spring for installing untreated, flexible conductors or those with a small cross-section that cannot be installed directly. Removing the conductor, after pressing the activation button Before removing the conductor, first press the activation button on top Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 27

28 5 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions Activating the 24-V-AUX-PWR terminals X5:1 X5:2 Connecting the conductor Loosen conductor Before inserting or removing a conductor, you have to insert a screw driver (max. blade width 3.5 mm) into the central opening to open the clamping spring. 28 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

29 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions Earth-leakage circuit breakers Do not use a conventional earth-leakage circuit breaker as a protective device. Universal current-sensitive earth leakage circuit-breakers (tripping current 3 ma) are permitted as a protective device. During normal operation of MOVMOT inverter, earth-leakage currents of > 3.5 ma can occur. SEW-EURODRVE recommends that you do not use earth-leakage circuit breakers. However, if an earth-leakage circuit breaker is stipulated for direct or indirect protection against contact, observe the following note in accordance with EN : WARNNG Wrong type of earth-leakage circuit breaker installed. Severe or fatal injuries. MOVMOT can cause direct current in the protective earth. n cases where an earthleakage circuit breaker is used for protection against direct or indirect contact, only install a type B earth-leakage circuit breaker on the power supply end of the MOVMOT inverter nput contactor Only use a contactor of utilization category AC3 (EN ) as an input contactor. NOTCE Do not use the K11 input contactor (see wiring diagram (page 37)) for jog mode, but only for switching the inverter on and off. For jog mode, use the the commands "CW / Stop" or "CCW / Stop". Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 s for the supply system contactor K11. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 29

30 5 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions Notes on PE connection DANGER ncorrect connection of PE. Death, severe injuries or damage to property from electric shock. The permitted tightening torque for the screw fitting is Nm (18-21 lb.in). Observe the following notes regarding PE connection. Prohibited assembly sequence Recommendation: Assembly with forked cable lug Permitted for all cross sections M5 Assembly with thick solid wire Permitted for cross sections up to max. 2.5 mm 2 M5 2.5 mm² [1] [1] Forked cable lug suitable for M5 PE screws Earth-leakage currents 3.5 ma may occur during normal operation. To meet the requirements of EN observe the following note: Route a second PE conductor with the cross section of the supply system lead in parallel to the protective earth via separate terminals or use a copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 1 mm 2. 3 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

31 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions EMC-compliant installation WARNNG! This drive system is not designed for operation on a public low voltage supply system that supplies residential areas. With respect to the EMC regulation, frequency inverters cannot be operated as standalone units. Regarding EMC, they can only be evaluated when they are integrated in a drive system. Conformity is declared for a described, CE-typical drive system. These operating instructions contain further information. NOTES This is a product with restricted availability in accordance with EC t may cause EMC interference. n this case, the operator may need to implement appropriate measures. For detailed information on EMC compliant installation, refer to the publication "Electromagnetic Compatibility in Drive Engineering" from SEW-EURODRVE nstallation altitude above 1 m above sea level MOVMOT drives with supply voltages of 2-24 V or 38-5 V can be used at altitudes above 1, msl up to 4, msl under the following conditions 1). The rated continuous power is reduced based on the reduced cooling above 1 m (see section "Technical Data"). Above 2 m asl, the air and creeping distances are only sufficient for overvoltage class 2. f the installation calls for overvoltage class 3, you will have to install additional external overvoltage protection to limit overvoltage peaks to 2.5 kv phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground. f safe electrical disconnection is required, it must be implemented outside the device at altitudes of 2, msl (safe electrical disconnection in accordance with EN ). n installation altitudes between 2, m to 4, msl, the permitted rated power supply voltages are reduced as follows: By 6 V per 1 m for MM..D-53- By 3 V per 1 m for MM..D Protection devices MOVMOT drives are equipped with integrated protection devices against overload. External overload devices are not necessary. 1) The maximum altitude is limited by creeping distances and flameproof components such as capacitors. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 31

32 5 Electrical nstallation nstallation instructions UL-compliant installation (in preparation) Use only copper cables with the temperature range 6/75 C as connection lead: The permitted tightening torques for MOVMOT power terminals are: 1.5 Nm (13 lb.in). MOVMOT is suited for operation on voltage supply systems with grounded star (TN and TT systems) supplying a maximum current of AC 5 A and a maximum rated voltage of AC 5 V. A UL-compliant use of MOVMOT requires the use of fuses with a performance data not exceeding 35 A / 6 V. NFORMATON Only use certified units with a limited output voltage (U max = DC 3 V) and limited output current ( 8 A) as an external DC 24 V voltage source. The UL certification only applies for the operation on voltage supply systems with voltages to ground of max. 3 V. The UL-certification does not apply for the operation on voltage supply systems with a non-grounded star point (T systems). 32 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

33 Electrical nstallation MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options Supply system and control A design with AVSK plug connector 1 x M12 plug Variant A1 A2 Type designation MM../AVSK MM../AVSK Switch S V supply Yellow AS-nterface cable Black AUX-PWR cable (Double pick-off) AS-nterface connection Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable (double pick-off) Power supply Terminals Terminals Sensor connection Terminals Terminals A1 A2 [1] [1] AS-nterface (YE) AS-nterface (YE) AUX-PWR (BK) [1] Power supply NFORMATON The designs listed above are also valid for mounting the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 33

34 5 Electrical nstallation MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options B design with AZSK plug connector 3 x M12 plug Variant B1 B2 B3 Type designation MM../AZSK MM../AZSK MM../AZSK S5 switch V supply Black AUX-PWR cable Black AUX-PWR cable (double pick-off) AS-nterface connection Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable (double pick-off) Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable Power supply Terminals Terminals Terminals Sensor connection 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) B1 2 x D B2 2 x D [1] [1] AUX-PWR (BK) AS-nterface (YE) AS-nterface (YE) AUX-PWR (BK) B3 2 x D [1] AS-nterface (YE) [1] Power supply NFORMATON The designs listed above are also valid for mounting the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor. 34 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

35 Electrical nstallation MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options 5 C design with AND3/AZSK plug connector 3 x M12 plug, 1 x Han Q8/ Variant C1 C2 C3 Type designation MM../AND3/AZSK MM../AND3/AZSK MM../AND3/AZSK S5 switch V supply Black AUX-PWR cable Black AUX-PWR cable (double pick-off) AS-nterface connection Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable (double pick-off) Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable Power supply AND3 plug connector AND3 plug connector AND3 plug connector Sensor connection 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) 1 x M12 plug connector (D2 + D3) C1 2 x D 2 x D C2 AUX-PWR (BK) AS-nterface (YE) AS-nterface (YE) AUX-PW (BK) [1] [1] C3 2 x D AS-nterface (YE) [1] [1] Power supply NFORMATON The designs listed above are also valid for mounting the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 35

36 5 Electrical nstallation MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface connection options D design with AZZK plug connector 3 x M12 plug, (1 x Han Q8/) Variant D1 D2 D3 D4 Type designation MM../AZZK MM../AZZK MM../AND3/AZZK MM../AND3/AZZK S5 switch V supply Yellow AS-nterface cable AS-nterface connection Yellow AS-nterface cable Black AUX-PWR cable (double pick-off) Yellow AS-nterface cable (double pick-off) Yellow AS-nterface cable Yellow AS-nterface cable Black AUX-PWR cable (double pick-off) Yellow AS-nterface cable (double pick-off) Power supply Terminals Terminals AND3 plug connector AND3 plug connector Sensor connection 2 x M12 plug connector (1 x D2 + 1 x D3) 2 x M12 plug connector (1 x D2 + 1 x D3) 2 x M12 plug connector (1 x D2 + 1 x D3) 2 x M12 plug connector (1 x D2 + 1 x D3) D1 1 x D D2 1 x D [1] [1] 1 x D 1 x D AS-nterface (YE) AS-nterface (YE) AUX-PWR (BK) D3 D4 1 x D 1 x D 1 x D 1 x D AS-nterface (YE) [1] AS-nterface (YE) AUX-PW (BK) [1] [1] Power supply NFORMATON The designs listed above are also valid for mounting the MOVMOT inverter close to the motor. 36 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

37 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 Electrical nstallation Connection of MOVMOT MM../AVSK (connection option A) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AVSK (connection option A) The following figure shows the connection in MM../AVSK design: L1 L2 L3 PE F11/F12/F13 K11 X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MM../AVSK M 3~ BE/BR X2 [1] RD WH BU X2 YE BW [2] X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 [3] 3 2 AS-nterface - 24 V 4 1 AS-nteface AVSK plug connector [1] X2: M12 plug connector (plug, yellow) 1 AS-nterface + AS-nterface data cable + 2 V Reference potential AUX PWR 3 AS-nterface - AS-nterface data cable V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) [2] [3] BW.. braking resistor (only for MOVMOT without mechanical brake) Plug connector for connecting the BEM option Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 37

38 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 5 Electrical nstallation Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZSK (connection option B) 5.4 Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZSK (connection option B) The following figure shows the connection in MM../AZSK design: L1 L2 L3 PE F11/F12/F13 K11 X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MM../AZSK M 3~ BE/BR X3 X2 [1] [2] [3] RD WH BU X1 X2 BK YE BK X3 4 1 X1 BW [4] X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 [5] AS-nterface - 24 V D2 VO V VO24 D3 AS-nteface AZSK plug connector [1] X1: M12 plug connector (plug, black) [2] X2: M12 plug connector (plug, yellow) [3] X3: M12 plug connector (socket, black) 1 24 V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) 2 N. C. Not connected 3 V Reference potential AUX PWR 4 N.C. Not connected 1 AS-nterface + AS-nterface data cable + 2 V Reference potential AUX PWR 3 AS-nterface - AS-nterface data cable V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 D3 D3 sensor input 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D2 D2 sensor input 5 PE PE [4] [5] BW.. braking resistor (only for MOVMOT without mechanical brake) Plug connector for connecting the BEM option 38 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

39 Electrical nstallation Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZSK (connection option C) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZSK (connection option C) The following figure shows the connection in MM../AND3/AZSK design: 24V [1] X1 V D3 VO [2] X3 PE VO24 D2 [3] X2 24V AS-nterface + AS-nterface - V 4 3 BK BK YE X1 X3 X2 N.C. N.C. L3 N.C. L1 [4] PE L2 N.C. N.C AZSK plug connector [1] X1: M12 plug connector (plug, black) [2] X3: M12 plug connector (socket, black) [3] X2: M12 plug connector (plug, yellow) AND3 plug connector [4] Plug connector AND3 (connector) 1 24 V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) 2 N. C. Not connected 3 V Reference potential AUX PWR 4 N.C. Not connected 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 D3 D3 sensor input 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D2 D2 sensor input 5 PE PE 1 AS-nterface + AS-nterface data cable + 2 V Reference potential AUX PWR 3 AS-nterface - AS-nterface data cable V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) 1 N.C. not connected (reserved for N) 2 L2 L2 power supply connection 3 N.C. Not connected 4 N.C. Not connected 5 N.C. Not connected 6 L3 L3 power supply connection 7 N.C. Not connected 8 L1 L1 power supply connection PE PE Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 39

40 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 5 Electrical nstallation Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZZK (connection option D1 / D2) 5.6 Connection of MOVMOT MM../AZZK (connection option D1 / D2) The following figure shows the connection in MM../AZZK design: L1 L2 L3 PE F11/F12/F13 K11 X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MM../AZZK M 3~ BE/BR X3 X2 RD WH BU BK 3 2 [1] X3 4 1 BK 3 2 [2] X1 4 1 [3] X2 YE X1 BW [4] X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 [5] D3 4 1 VO D2 VO AS-nterface - 24 V 4 1 VO24 VO24 AS-nteface AZZK plug connector [1] X3: M12 plug connector (socket, black) [2] X1: M12 plug connector (socket, black) X1 [3] X2: M12 plug connector (plug, yellow) 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 N.C. Not connected 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D3 D3 sensor input 5 PE PE 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 N.C. Not connected 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D2 D2 sensor input 5 PE PE 1 AS-nterface + AS-nterface data cable + 2 V Reference potential AUX PWR 3 AS-nterface - AS-nterface data cable V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) [4] [5] BW.. braking resistor (only for MOVMOT without mechanical brake) Plug connector for connecting the BEM option 4 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

41 Electrical nstallation Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZZK (connection option D3 / D4) Connection of MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZZK (connection option D3 / D4) The following figure shows the connection in MM../AND3/AZZK design: VO [1] [2] [3] X1 PE VO24 D2 VO X3 PE VO24 D3 X2 24V AS-nterface + AS-nterface - V 3 4 BK BK YE 1 2 X1 X3 X2 N.C. N.C. L3 N.C. L1 [4] PE L2 N.C. N.C AZZK plug connector [1] X1: M12 plug connector (socket, black) [2] X3: M12 plug connector (socket, black) [3] X2: M12 plug connector (plug, yellow) AND3 plug connector [4] Plug connector AND3 (connector) 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 N.C. Not connected 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D2 D2 sensor input 5 PE PE 1 VO24 24 V voltage supply for sensors 2 N.C. Not connected 3 VO V reference potential for sensors 4 D3 D3 sensor input 5 PE PE 1 AS-nterface + AS-nterface data cable + 2 V Reference potential AUX PWR 3 AS-nterface - AS-nterface data cable V 24 V supply (AUX PWR) 1 N.C. not connected (reserved for N) 2 L2 L2 power supply connection 3 N.C. Not connected 4 N.C. Not connected 5 N.C. Not connected 6 L3 L3 power supply connection 7 N.C. Not connected 8 L1 L1 power supply connection PE PE Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 41

42 5 Electrical nstallation Connection between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the 5.8 Connection between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the motor f the MOVMOT inverter is mounted close to the motor, the connection to the motor is realized with a pre-fabricated cable (hybrid cable). Use only hybrid cables from SEW-EURODRVE to connect the MOVMOT inverter with the motor. There are the following connection options to the motor, depending on the hybrid cable used: Variant A1 A2 A3 A4 MOVMOT APG4 APG4 APG4 APG4 Motor Cable gland/terminals ASB4 APG4 SU4 Hybrid cables for DR X for DR.71-DR for DR for DR.71-DR.132 A1 A2 APG4 APG4 [1] ASB4 A3 A4 APG4 APG4 APG4 SU [1] Connection via terminals 42 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

43 Electrical nstallation Connection between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the Overview of connections between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the motor MOVMOT inverter Version Hybrid cables Drive MM../P2.A/RR.A/APG4 A1 Part number DR71 DR1: Part number DR112 DR132: AC motors with cable gland APG4 A2 Part number: AC motors with ASB4 plug connector A3 Part number: AC motors with APG4 plug connector A4 Part number: ( ) Part number: ( ) AC motors with plug connector SU4 Size DR.63 R 1/ Laenge (m): Auftragsnummer: A4 Part number: ( ) Part number: X ( ) AC motors with plug connector SU4 Size DR.71 DR.132 R 1/ Laenge (m): Auftragsnummer: Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 43

44 5 Electrical nstallation Connection between MOVMOT and motor when mounted close to the Hybrid cable connection The following tables shows the conductor assignment in hybrid cables with part number and the corresponding motor terminals of the DR motor: DR motor terminal U1 V1 W1 4a 3a 5a 1b 2b PE connection Wire color/hybrid cable designation Black/U1 Black/V1 Black/W1 Red/13 White/14 Blue/15 Black/1 Black/2 Green/yellow + shield end (internal shield) The following figure shows the connection of the hybrid cable to the terminal box of the DR motor. PE GNYE U1 V1 W1 BK/W1 BK/V1 BK/U1 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 1b 2b BU RD WH BK/1 BK/2 W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

45 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 Electrical nstallation Connecting the MOVMOT options Connecting the MOVMOT options Connection of MLU13A option For more information about mounting the MLU13A option, refer to section "MLU13A option" (page 2). The following figure shows how to connect the MLU13A option: X1: L1 X1: L2 YE YE YE MOVMOT L1 L2 L3 MLU13A BU RD AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 D2 D3 24V V24 V X1: L3 X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 45

46 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 5 Electrical nstallation Connecting the MOVMOT options Connection of the MNF21A option (in preparation) STOP Only install this option in combination with the modular connection box of MOVMOT MM3D-53- MM15D-53-. For more information about mounting the MNF21A option, refer to section "MNF21Aoption" (page 21). The following figure shows how to connect the MNF21A option: L1 L2 L3 PE F11/F12/F13 K11 [1] MNF21A L1 L1 X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MOVMOT L2 L2 L3 L3 BE/BR RD WH BU BW [3] [2] [2] AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 D2 D3 V24 V 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b [1] Keep the cable length for the power supply as short as possible. [2] Keep the length of the brake cables as short as possible. Do not route the brake cables in parallel, but as far away from the power supply cables as possible. [3] BW braking resistor (only in MOVMOT without mechanical brake) 46 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

47 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 Electrical nstallation Connecting the MOVMOT options Connection of URM option For more information about mounting the URM option, refer to section "URM/BEM option" (page 22). The following figure shows how to connect the URM option: URM X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MOVMOT M 3~ BE/BR RD WH AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 D2 D3 V24 V X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b BU Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 47

48 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 5 Electrical nstallation Connecting the MOVMOT options Connection of BEM option For more information about mounting the BEM option, refer to section "URM/BEM option" (page 22). The following figure shows how to connect the BEM option: L1 L2 L3 PE F11/F12/F13 K11 BEM X1: L1 X1: L2 X1: L3 MOVMOT U N U E + _ ~ ~ RD BU BK BK M 3~ BE/BR RD WH BU X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 D2 D3 V24 V X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b BW Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

49 Electrical nstallation Connecting the DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Connecting the DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) MOVMOT drives are equipped with an X5 diagnostics interface (RJ1 plug connector) for startup, configuration and service. The X5 diagnostics interface is located on top of the MOVMOT inverter. DKG6B MOVMOT DBG WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. You can also connect the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT drive using option DKG6B (5 m extension cable). Extension cable Description (= scope of delivery) Part number DKG6B Length 5 m core, shielded cable (AWG26) Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 49

50 5 Electrical nstallation PC connection 5.11 PC connection MOVMOT drives are equipped with an X5 diagnostics interface (RJ1 plug connector) for startup, configuration and service. The diagnostics interface [1] is located on top of the MOVMOT inverter. The diagnostic interface can be connected to a PC using one of the following options: USB11A with USB interface, part number UWS21B with serial interface RS-232, part number Scope of delivery: nterface adapter Cable with RJ1 plug connector nterface cable USB (USB11A) or RS-232 (UWS21B) USB USB11A RJ1 [1] MOVMOT PC + MOVTOOLS RS-232 UWS21B RJ WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. 5 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

51 Startup nstructions Overview 6 6 Startup nstructions 6.1 Overview You can select one of the following modes for starting up MOVMOT with AS-nterface: MOVMOT with MLK3A binary slave When selecting "Easy", you start up MOVMOT using DP switches S1, S2 and switches f2, t1, quick and easy. For information on "Easy" startup, refer to section "Starting up MOVMOT with binary slave in "Easy" mode (page 52). n "Expert" mode, an extended scope of parameters is available. You can use the MOVTOOLS MotionStudio software or the DGB keypad to adjust the parameters to the application. For information on "Expert" startup, refer to section "Starting up MOVMOT with binary slave in "Expert" mode (page 83). MOVMOT with MLK31A double slave For information regarding the startup with the double slave, refer to section "Startup MOVMOT with double slave" (page 113). 6.2 mportant notes on startup DANGER Before removing / fitting the MOVMOT inverter, you must disconnect it from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to one minute after disconnection from the power supply. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. NFORMATON Remove paint protection cap from the status LED and the two AS-nterface LEDs before startup. Remove paint protection film from the nameplates before startup. Check that all protective covers are installed correctly. Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 seconds for the mains contactor K11. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 51

52 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode mportant notes on startup 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode NOTE When selecting "Easy", you start up MOVMOT using DP switches S1, S2 and switches f2, t1, quick and easy. 7.1 mportant notes on startup DANGER Before removing / fitting the MOVMOT inverter, you must disconnect it from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to one minute after disconnection from the power supply. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. NFORMATON Remove paint protection cap from the status LED and the two AS-nterface LEDs before startup. Remove paint protection film from the nameplates before startup. Check that all protective covers are installed correctly. Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 seconds for the mains contactor K Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

53 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of the controls Description of the controls Setpoint potentiometer f1 Use the f1 potentiometer to adjust setpoint f1. f[hz] 1 f [1] [1] Potentiometer setting NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. Missing or incorrectly installed screw plugs can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. Make sure the screw plug of the setpoint potentiometer f1 has a seal and screw it in. Setpoint f1 is active when the AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/sped f1" = "" Switch f Use the f2 switch to adjust setpoint f2. Switch f2 Detent setting Setpoint f2 [Hz] Minimum frequency [Hz] Setpoint f2 is active when the AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "1" Switch t Use switch t1 to set the acceleration of the MOVMOT drive. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Switch t1 Detent setting Ramp time t1 [s],1,2,3,5, Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 53

54 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of the controls DP switches S1 and S DP switch S1: S Meaning Binary encoding RS-485 unit address Motor protection ON Off OFF On Motor Power rating Motor one size smaller Motor adjusted PWM Frequency Variable (16,8,4 khz) No-load damping On 4 khz Off DP switch S2: S Meaning Brake type Release brake none Enable ON OFF NOTCE Optional brake Standard brake Operating mode Speed monitoring Binary encoding additional functions On V/f On Off VFC Off Set the DP switches using suitable tools, e.g. a flat tip screwdriver with a blade width 3mm. The force used for setting the DP switches must not exceed 5 N. 54 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

55 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of the DP switches S Description of the DP switches S DP switches S1/1 S1/4 RS-485 address of the MOVMOT inverter Set the DP switches S1/1 - S1/4 as follows for MOVMOT with AS-nterface: ON ON DP switch S1/5 Motor protection switched on / off When MOVMOT is installed close to the motor, the motor protection function must be deactivated. To ensure that the motor is protected all the same, a TH (bimetallic thermostat) must be installed. The TH opens the sensor circuit when the rated response temperature is reached. SEW-EURODRVE recommends to wire the TH via input D2, see following figure. nput D2 must be monitored by an external controller. As soon as input D2 = "", the external controller must switch off the drive (bit DO and DO1 = ""). MOVMOT AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 D2 D3 V24 V X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b TH NFORMATON When mounted close to the motor, input D2 is no longer available for connecting external sensors. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 55

56 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of the DP switches S DP switch S1/6 Lower motor power rating When activated, this DP switch enables MOVMOT to be assigned to a motor with a lower power rating. The rated unit power is not affected. When a motor with a lower power rating is used, the overload capacity of the drive can be increased because, from the perspective of the motor, MOVMOT is one power rating too big. A higher current can be provided briefly, leading to higher torque ratings. The aim of this switch S1/6 is to achieve short-term utilization of the motor's peak torque. The motor protection function is adjusted depending on the motor power and the switch setting. Stall protection for the motor is not possible in this operating mode (S1/6 = "ON"). Power Motor type MOVMOT type 23/4 V Motor in connection Motor in connection [kw] 5 Hz 1) S1/6 = OFF S1/6 = ON S1/6 = OFF S1/6 = ON.25 DFR63L4/.. - MM3D MM3D MM5D DRS71S4/TH. MM3D MM5D MM5D MM7D DRS71M4/.. MM5D MM7D MM7D MM11D DRS8S4/...75 DRE8M4/.. MM7D MM11D MM11D MM15D DRP9M4/.. DRS8M4/ DRE9M4/.. MM11D MM15D MM15D MM22D DRP9L4/.. DRS9M4/ DRE9L4/.. MM15D MM22D MM22D MM3D DRP1M4/.. DRS9L4/ DRE1M4/.. MM22D MM3D MM3D MM4D DRP1L4/.. DRS1M4/.. 3 DRE1LC4/.. MM3D MM4D MM4D DRP112M4/TH.. DRS1LC4/.. 4 DRE132S4/.. MM4D DRP132M4/.. 1) On request, SEW-EURODRVE provides the motor assignment of motors with 23/4 V, 6 Hz or 266/ 46 V, 6 Hz. 56 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

57 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of DP switches S DP switch S1/7 Setting the maximum PWM frequency When DP switch S1/7 is set to "OFF", the MOVMOT unit operates with 4 khz PWM frequency. When DP switch S1/7 is set to "ON", the MOVMOT unit operates with a 16 khz PWM frequency (low noise) and switches back in steps to lower switching frequencies depending on the heat sink temperature and the inverter load DP switch S1/8 No-load vibration damping (S1/8 = "ON") When setting DP switch S1/8 = "ON", this function reduces resonance during no-load operation. 7.4 Description of DP switches S DP switch S2/1 Brake type When using the standard brake, the DP switch 2/1 must be set to "OFF". When using the optional brake, the DP switch 2/1 must be set to "ON". Motor Standard brake [type] Optional brake [type] S2/1 = "OFF" S2/1 = "ON" DR.63L4 BR3 DR.71S4 BE5 BE1 DR.71M4 BE1 BE5 DR.8S4 BE1 BE5 DRE8M4 BE1 BE5 DRS8M4 BE2 BE1 DRS9M4/DRE9M4 BE2 BE1 DRP9M4 BE1 BE2 DRE9L4 BE2 BE1 DRS9L4 BE5 BE2 DRS1M4 / DRE1M4 BE5 BE2 DRP1M4 BE2 BE5 DR.1LC4 BE5 BE2 DR.1L4 BE5 BE2 DRP112M4 BE5 BE11 DR.132S4 BE5 BE11 DRP132M4 BE5 BE11 Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT type Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 1 (MM3.. to MM15..). 23 V MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 2 (MM22.. to MM4..) 12 V MOVMOT MM..D-233, size 1 and 2 (MM3.. to MM4..) 57

58 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of DP switches S DP switch S2/2 Brake release without enable When switch S2/2 is set to "ON", it is possible to release the brake even if there is no drive enable. This function is only available for brakemotors. This function is not available in hoist operation. Functional description The brake can be released by setting the AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1". The following conditions must be met: State of the AS-nterface bits DO (R) "1" "" "1" "" "1" "" DO1 (L) "" "1" "" "1" "1" "" DO2 (f2/f1) DO3 (Reset/ enable Enable status Error status Brake function "" "1" Unit enabled No unit error "1" "1" Unit enabled No unit error "" "1" Unit not Enabled "1" "1" "1" "1" Unit not Enabled "" "" "1" "1" Unit not Enabled All statuses possible NFORMATON Unit not Enabled No unit error No unit error No unit error unit error Brake is controlled by MOVMOT, setpoint f1 Brake is controlled by MOVMOT, setpoint f2 Brake applied Brake applied Brake released for manual movement Brake applied n order to be able to release the brake without the drive being enabled, the AS-nterface bit DO3 "Reset/controller enable" must be set. Setpoint selection Setpoints are selected depending on the AS-nterface bit DO2 "Speed f2/speed f1". Enable status AS-nterface bit Active setpoint Unit enabled DO2 = "" Setpoint potentiometer f1 active Unit enabled DO2 = "1" Setpoint potentiometer f2 active Behavior if unit not ready LED display When a unit is not ready for operation, the brake is always applied, regardless of the position of the AS-nterface bit DO2 "Speed f2/speed f1." The MOVMOT status LED flashes yellow at a fast rate (t on : t off = 1 ms : 3 ms) if the brake has been released for manual movement. 58 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

59 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Description of DP switches S DP switch S2/3 Operating mode DP switch S2/3 = "OFF": VFC operation for 4-pole motors DP switch S2/3 = "ON": V/f operation reserved for special cases DP switch S2/4 Speed monitoring Speed monitoring (S2/4 = "ON") protects the drive when it is blocked. f the drive is operated at the current limit for longer than 1 second when speed monitoring is active (S2/4 = "ON"), the MOVMOT inverter trips the speed monitoring. The status LED of the MOVMOT inverter signalizes the error by slowly flashing red (error code 8). This error only occurs when the current limit has been reached for the duration of the deceleration time DP switches S2/5 S2/8 Additional functions The binary coding of the DP switches S2/5 - S2/8 allows for the activation of additional functions. Proceed as follows to activate possible additional functions: Decimal Value S2/5 X X X X X X X X S2/6 X X X X X X X X S2/7 X X X X X X X X S2/8 X X X X X X X X X = ON = OFF For an overview of additional functions, refer to section "Available additional functions". Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 59

60 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Selectable additional functions of MM..D Overview of the available additional functions Decimal Brief description Limitations see value Basic functions, no additional function selected 1 MOVMOT with increased ramp times (page 61) 2 MOVMOT with adjustable current limitation (Error if exceeded) (page 61) 3 MOVMOT with adjustable current limitation (switchable via AS-nterface bit DO2) (page 62) 4 Not possible with MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface 5 Not possible with MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface 6 MOVMOT with maximum PWM frequency of 8 khz (page 64) 7 MOVMOT with rapid start / stop (page 64) 8 MOVMOT with minimum frequency Hz (page 65) 9 MOVMOT for hoist applications (page 66) 1 MOVMOT with minimum frequency Hz and reduced torque at low frequencies (page 68) 11 Monitoring of supply-phase failure deactivated (page 69) 12 Not possible with MOVMOT with integrated AS-nterface 13 MOVMOT with extended speed monitoring function (page 69) 14 MOVMOT with deactivated slip compensation (page 73) 15 Not assigned 6 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

61 7 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 1 MOVMOT with increased ramp times ON S Functional description t is possible to set ramp times of up to 4 s. Changed ramp times Switch t1 Detent setting Ramp time t1 [s],1,2,3,5, = corresponds to standard setting = changed ramp times Additional function 2 MOVMOT with adjustable current limitation (error if exceeded) ON S Functional description Adjustable current limits The current limit can be set using switch f2. Setpoint f2 and the minimum frequency are set to the following values: Setpoint f2: 5 Hz Minimum frequency: 2 Hz The monitoring function comes into effect above 15 Hz. f the drive operates at the current limit for longer than 5 ms, the unit generates an error (error 44). This is indicated by the status LED flashing red quickly. Switch f2 Detent setting max [%] of N Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 61

62 7 8 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 3 MOVMOT with adjustable current limitation (switchable via AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1") reduction of the frequency when exceeded ON S Functional description Response upon reaching the current limit System internal values for setpoint f2 / minimum frequency Adjustable current limits The current limitation can be set using switch f2. The AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/ speed f1" can be used to switch between the maximum current limit and the current limit set with switch f2. When the current limit is reached, the unit reduces the frequency via the current limitation function. f necessary, the ramp is stopped to prevent the current from increasing. f the unit is operating at the current limit, the status LED indicates this status by flashing green quickly. t is no longer possible to switch between setpoint f2 and setpoint f1 via the AS- nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1", or to adjust the minimum frequency. The minimum frequency is fixed at 2 Hz. Adjust the current limits via switch f2 according to the following table: Switch f2 Detent setting max [%] of N Selection of the current limits via AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/ speed f1" Select the current limits via the AS-nterface bit DO2: AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "" Default current limitation AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "1" Current limitation via switch f2 62 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

63 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53-7 nfluencing the current characteristic curve The current limit curve is calculated with a constant factor by selecting a lower current limit. Motor with star connection max / n [%] 2 16 [1] [2] f [Hz] [1] [2] Current limit characteristic curve of standard function Reduced current limit curve for additional function 3 and AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "1" Motor with delta connection max / n [%] 2 16 [1] [2] f [Hz] [1] [2] Current limit characteristic curve of standard function Reduced current limit curve for additional function 3 and AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "1" Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 63

64 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 6 MOVMOT with maximum 8 khz PWM frequency ON S Functional description This additional function reduces the maximum PWM frequency from 16 khz to 8 khz Adjust the PWM frequency via the DP switch S1/7 When DP switch S1/7 is set to "ON", the unit operates with an 8 khz PWM frequency and switches back to 4 khz depending on the heat sink temperature. ON S1/7 without additional function 6 PWM frequency variable 16, 8, 4 khz S1/7 with additional function 6 PWM frequency variable 8, 4 khz OFF PWM frequency 4 khz PWM frequency 4 khz Additional function 7 MOVMOT with rapid start / stop ON S Functional description The pre-magnetization time is set to s. Pre-magnetization is not performed after the drive is enabled. This is necessary to start acceleration along the setpoint ramp as quickly as possible. f a brake is connected to terminals X1:13, X1:14, X1:15, the brake in controlled by MOVMOT. f a brake resistor is connected to terminals X1:13, X1:15, the SEW brake is controlled via output X1 and option BEM. The relay is assigned the "Brake released" function. 64 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

65 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53-7 Control via AS- nterface The rapid stop function (applying the brake and inhibiting the output stage) can be realized via the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" when controlling via AS-nterface. When the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" is reset to "" during enable or during a downwards ramp, MOVMOT applies the brake and inhibits the output stage. f the motor frequency is lower than the stop frequency, MOVMOT applies the brake irrespective of the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable". After having activated rapid stop, do not enable the drive until it has reached standstill Additional function 8 MOVMOT with minimum frequency Hz ON S Functional description n detent position of switch f2, the setpoint f2 with the activated additional function is Hz. All other values that can be set remain unchanged. Switch f2 Detent setting Minimum frequency [Hz] with additional function activated Minimum frequency [Hz] without additional function Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 65

66 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 9 MOVMOT for hoist applications ON S DANGER Risk of fatal injury if the hoist falls. Severe or fatal injuries or damage to property. MOVMOT may not be used as a safety device in hoist applications. Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure safety. NOTCE n order to avoid a system overload, the MOVMOT drive may not be operated at the current limit. Activate speed monitoring, which means when the MOVMOT drive is operated at the current limit for longer than 1 s, it will trigger the error message F8 "speed monitoring". Requirements NOTCE MOVMOT can only be used in hoist applications if the following prerequisites are met: Additional function 9 is only possible in conjunction with brakemotors. Make sure that the DP switch S2/3 is set to "OFF" (VFC operation). The BEM brake controller must be used with an external braking resistor. The "Speed monitoring" (page 59) function is activated. 66 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

67 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53-7 Functional description The start frequency is 2 Hz. f the function is not activated, the start frequency is.5 Hz. The brake release time is set to 2 ms (standard = ms) This setting prevents the motor from working against the brake. The brake application time (post-magnetization time) is fixed to 2 ms. This setting ensures that the brake is applied as soon as the motor stops generating torque. f a brake resistor is connected to terminals X1:13, X1:15, the SEW brake is controlled via output X1 and option BEM. Overview of brake control with additional function 9: [1] t [2] 1 [3] t t 2 ms [4] 2 ms [5] t [6] [7] 2Hz [1] [2] [3] Enable Pre-magnetization time Brake control signal "1" = released, "" = applied [4] [5] Brake release time Brake application time (Post-magnetization time) [6] [7] Frequency Stop frequency = Start / minimum frequency A braking resistor (BW..) must be connected to terminals X1:13 and X1:15 of MOVMOT. Terminal X1:14 is not assigned. NFORMATON The "Brake release without enable" is not available in hoist operation Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 67

68 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53- Control via AS- nterface The rapid stop function (applying the brake and inhibiting the output stage) can be realized via the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" when controlling via AS-nterface. When the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" is reset to "" during enable or during a downwards ramp, MOVMOT applies the brake and inhibits the output stage. f the motor frequency is lower than the stop frequency, MOVMOT applies the brake irrespective of the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable". After having activated rapid stop, do not enable the drive until it has reached standstill Additional function 1 MOVMOT with reduced torque at low frequencies ON S Functional description Through reducing the slip compensation and active current at low speeds, the drive only develops a reduced torque (see the illustration which follows): Minimum frequency = Hz, see additional function 8 (page 65). M [1] [2] f [Hz] [1] Maximum torque in VFC mode [2] Maximum torque when additional function 1 is activated 68 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

69 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 11 Deactivating the mains phase failure monitoring STOP! Deactivating the mains phase failure monitoring can damage the unit if conditions are unfavorable. ON S Functional description When the additional function is activated, the phases are not monitored. t is a good idea to deactivate this function for power supplies with short-term asymmetries, for example Additional function 13 MOVMOT with extended speed monitoring function ON S DANGER Risk of fatal injury if the hoist falls. Severe or fatal injuries or damage to property. MOVMOT may not be used as a safety device in hoist applications. Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure safety. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 69

70 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53- Requirements NOTCE MOVMOT can only be used in hoist applications if the following prerequisites are met: Additional function 13 is only possible in conjunction with brakemotors. Make sure that the DP switch S2/3 is set to "OFF" (VFC operation). The BEM brake controller must be used with an external braking resistor. Functional description Control via AS- nterface Additional function 13 includes the following functions: Additional function 9, MOVMOT for hoist applications Speed monitoring with adjustable monitoring time Once additional function 13 is activated, speed monitoring is always on, regardless of the setting of DP switch S2/4. Once the additional function 13 has been activated, the DP switch S2/4 has the following functionality: S2/4 = "OFF" The speed monitoring time 2 is set at switch t1. The speed monitoring times 1 and 3 are fixed to 1 s. Setpoint f2 is set as switch f2. The ramp time is fixed to 1 s. The minimum frequency is fixed at 2 Hz. S2/4 = "ON" The speed monitoring time 2 is set at switch f2. The speed monitoring times 1 and 3 are fixed to 1 s. The setpoint f2 is fixed at 5 Hz. The ramp time is set at switch t1. The minimum frequency is fixed at 2 Hz. When the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" is reset to "", MOVMOT applies the brake and inhibits the output stage. f the motor frequency is lower than the stop frequency, MOVMOT applies the brake irrespective of the AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable". 7 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

71 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53-7 Setting options of additional function 13 Additional function 13 is active MOVMOT with extended speed monitoring function DP switch S2/4 OFF ON Ramp time 1 s Switch t1 setpoint f2 Switch f2 5 Hz Minimum frequency 2 Hz 2 Hz Monitoring time 2 Switch t1 Switch f2 Monitoring time 1, 3 1 s 1 s Setting the speed monitoring times When additional function 13 is active, the following values may be set as monitoring times on switches t1 and f2: Switch t1 or f2 (see above) Detent setting Monitoring time 2 [s],1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 1, 1,5 Monitoring times 1 and 3 [s],1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 1, 1,5 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 71

72 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D-53- Validity of the speed monitoring times n [1] [2] [3] t n n2 [2] [1] [2] [3] [2] n1 t n n3 [2] [3] [1] [2] t n4 [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] Validity of monitoring time 1 Validity of monitoring time 2 Validity of monitoring time 3 [4] [5] Speed setpoint Speed output (actual value) Monitoring time 1 is valid when the actual speed increases after a setpoint change. The validity range of monitoring time 2 begins when the setpoint is reached. The validity range of monitoring time 3 applies when the actual speed decreases after a setpoint change. 72 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

73 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Selectable additional functions of MM..D Additional function 14 MOVMOT with deactivated slip compensation ON S Functional description Slip compensation is deactivated. Deactivating slip compensation can reduce the speed accuracy of the motor. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 73

74 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure 7.6 Startup procedure DANGER When working on the unit, dangerous voltage levels may still be present up to 1 minute after the mains is disconnected! Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. 1. Remove the MOVMOT inverter from the terminal box. 2. Set the desired AS-nterface address with a hand-held programming device (page 76) or with a master (see description of the AS-nterface master). 3. Check the connection of the MOVMOT inverter. See section "Electrical nstallation". 4. Set the type of 24 V supply via the switch S5 (page 78). 5. Set DP switches S1/1 S1/4 as follows. ON ON Set the first speed at the setpoint potentiometer f1 (active when the AS-nterface bit DO2 = ""). Factory setting: about 5 Hz (15 rpm). f[hz] 1 f [1] [1] Potentiometer setting 74 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

75 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure 7 7. Make sure the screw plug of the setpoint potentiometer f1 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter Set the second speed at the switch f2 (active when the AS-nterface bit DO2 = "1"). Switch f2 Detent setting Setpoint f2 [Hz] NFORMATON The first speed can be changed infinitely variable during operation using the setpoint potentiometer f1, which is accessible from the outside. Speeds f1 and f2 can be set independently of each other Set the ramp time at the switch t1. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Switch t1 Detent setting Ramp time t1 [s] Place the MOVMOT inverter onto the terminal box and screw it on. 11.Switch on the following voltages. AS-nterface voltage DC 24 V auxiliary voltage (only for 24 V supply via the black AUX-PWR cable) Supply voltage Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 75

76 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure Assigning the slave address MOVMOT drives with MLK3.A AS-nterface option are set to address by default. You have the following options for assigning the AS-nterface address of the MOVMOT inverter with MLK3.A AS-nterface option (address 1-31): Addresses are assigned automatically within a configured AS-nterface system when replacing a MOVMOT drive with MLK3.A AS-nterface option. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: The new MOVMOT drive with AS-nterface option MLK3.A must have the address. f you need to replace several MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK3.A, you must replace them individually (one after the other). Manual address assignment via the plant master The drives must be connected to the AS-nterface cable one after another. Doing so prevents several MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK3.A from having assigned the same address. Manual address assignment using a hand-held AS-nterface programming device. Observe the notes in the next chapter when connecting the MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK3.A to the AS-nterface cable. Assigning the slave address using a hand-held programming device Hand-held AS-nterface programming devices offer the following functions: Reading out and changing an AS-nterface slave address Reading out the AS-nterface profile Reading out and changing the data and parameter bits Function check and test run. Hand-held programming devices do not provide sufficient current for the operation. This is why an external voltage supply (AUX-PWR) is required for the function check and the test run. When using a hand-held programming device, you need a 2-core connection cable that fits onto the AS-interface plug connector of MOVMOT (see the following figure) : AS-nterface + 2: V24 [1] 3: AS-nterface - 4: 24V [1] [1] Do not connect pin 2 and 4 for the address assignment! NOTCE The hand-held programming device may only be connected via pins 1 "AS- nterface +" and 3 "AS-nterface -" with the AS-nterface plug connector. The handheld programming device can be damaged if not connected properly. Prior to the address assignment via a hand-held programming device, switch S5 in the MOVMOT terminal box must be set to "1"! After the address assignment you have to set the S5 according to the kind of 24 V voltage supply. 76 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

77 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure 7 Example: Disconnect the AS-nterface nodes from the AS-nterface network one at a time and assign addresses via the hand-held programming device (A). Then reconnect the respective AS-nterface node to the AS-nterface network (B). A B MOVMOT [1] [1] AS-nterface hand-held programming device Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 77

78 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure Setting the 24 V supply via switch S5 The switch S5 [1] is located on the connection board. [1] [1] Size 1 Size [1] S5 switch Use switch S5 to set the type of 24 V supply. Switch Switch S5 = "1" 24 V voltage supply Supplying the MOVMOT using AUX PWR (e.g. black AS-nterface cable) S5 24V AS- AS BK YE Switch S5 = "" Supplying MOVMOT via the AS-nterface data cable S5 24V AS - AS YE 78 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

79 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure Data AS-nterface master MOVMOT The following table shows the 4 data bits that the AS-nterface master sends to the MOVMOT inverter via the AS-nterface: AS-nterface bit Function (page 8) DO CW operation/stop DO1 CCW operation/stop DO2 Speed f2/speed f1 DO3 Reset 1) / Controller enable 1) in the event of an edge change "" "1" (only effective in case of an error) NFORMATON To enable the drive, AS-nterface bit DO3 "reset/controller enable" must be set to be able to enable the drive Data MOVMOT AS-nterface master The following table shows the 4 data bits that the MOVMOT inverter sends to the AS- nterface master via the AS-nterface: Bit D D1 Function Ready signal : The MOVMOT drive is not ready for operation 1: The MOVMOT drive is ready for operation Manual operation : MOVMOT Control via AS-nterface 1: MOVMOT control via manual operation D2 Sensor input 1 : The signal of sensor 1 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 1 = "1" D3 Sensor input 2 : The signal of sensor 2 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 2 = "1" Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 79

80 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Startup procedure Setpoint scaling via parameter bits The following table lists the parameter bits for setpoint scaling The setpoint scaling does only affect setpoint f1 that can be set externally. Setpoint f2 and the minimum frequency are not affected by the scaling. The following table lists the possible setpoint frequencies for setpoint potentiometer f1 = 1 Hz (3 rpm) and f1 = 5 Hz (15 rpm): Parameter bits Factor Setpoint frequency [Hz] Setpoint frequency [Hz] P3 P2 P1 P for f1 = 1 Hz f1 = 5 Hz nverter behavior depending on the AS-nterface bits nverter behavior Power supply X1: L1-L3 AS-nterface bit DO3 DO2 DO DO1 Reset/controller enable Speed f2/ speed f1 CW operation/stop CCW operation/stop Status LED nverter off x x x Flashing yellow nverter off 1 x x x Yellow Stop, no supply system 1 x x x Flashing yellow Stop 1 1 x Yellow CW with f Green CCW with f Green CW with f Green CCW with f Green Stop 1 1 x 1 1 Yellow Key = No voltage 1 = Stress x = Any 8 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

81 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor When the MOVMOT inverter with is installed close to the motor, observe the notes in the following sections: Checking the connection type of the connected motor Use the following figure to check that the selected connection type is identical for the MOVMOT and the connected motor. W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W mportant: For brakemotors: Do not install brake rectifiers inside the terminal box of the motor! Motor protection The connected motor must be equipped with a TH. SEW-EURODRVE recommends to wire the TH via input D2, see following figure. nput D2 must be monitored by an external controller. As soon as input D2 = "", the external controller must switch off the drive (bit DO and DO1 = ""). MOVMOT AS+ X6: 8 AS- X6: 7 D2 D3 V24 V X6: 6 X6: 5 X6: 3,4 X6: 1,2 24V X5: 2a,2b X5: 1a,1b TH NFORMATON When mounted close to the motor, input D2 is no longer available for connecting external sensors. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 81

82 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 7 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Easy" Mode Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor DP switch When the MOVMOT inverter is installed close to the motor, the DP switch S1/5 must be changed from the factory setting to "ON": S Meaning Binary encoding RS-485 unit address Motor protection ON Off 6 Motor power rating Motor one size smaller 7 PWM Frequency Variable (16,8,4 khz) 8 No-load damping OFF On Adjusted 4 khz Off On braking resistor For motors without brake, a braking resistor must be connected to the MOVMOT. BW1 / BW For brakemotors without BEM option, no braking resistor may be connected to the MOVMOT. For brakemotors with BEM option and external braking resistor, the external braking resistor and the brake must be connected as follows: X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 L1 L2 BW ~ ~ + _ UN BEM U E RD BU BK BK RD WH BU BE/BR M 3~ Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

83 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode mportant notes on startup 8 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode NFORMATON "Expert" startup is only necessary if parameters are to be set during startup. "Expert" startup is only possible if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and parameter P85 Startup mode = "Expert" 8.1 mportant notes on startup DANGER Before removing / fitting the MOVMOT inverter, you must disconnect it from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to one minute after disconnection from the power supply. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. NFORMATON Remove paint protection cap from the status LED and the two AS-nterface LEDs before startup. Remove paint protection film from the nameplates before startup. Check that all protective covers are installed correctly. Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 seconds for the mains contactor K11. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 83

84 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 8.2 MOVTOOLS MotionStudio The "MOVTOOLS MotionStudio" software package is the SEW engineering tool that you can use to access all SEW drive units. With simple applications, you can use the MOVTOOLS MotionStudio to perform diagnostics for the MOVMOT inverter. For more demanding applications, you can use the wizards available in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio to startup and configure MOVMOT inverters. The scope function in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio can be used for visualizing process values. nstall the latest software version of MOVTOOLS MotionStudio on your PC. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio can communicate with the drive units using different communication links and fieldbus systems. The following section describes the most straightforward application, a connection between a PC / laptop and a MOVMOT inverter via the diagnostics interface X5 (pointto-point connection). 84 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

85 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode MOVTOOLS MotionStudio ntegrating MOVMOT into MOVTOOLS MotionStudio NFORMATON For a detailed description of the following steps, please refer to the comprehensive online help in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 1. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 2. Create a project and network. 3. Configure the communication channel at the PC. 4. Make sure that the voltage supply of the MOVMOT inverter is connected. 5. Perform an online scan. NFORMATON The diagnostic interface is always assigned address 32. Adjust the scan range in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio in such a way that address 32 is also scanned. The baud rate is 9.6 kbaud. The online scan can take some time. 6. MOVMOT, for example, is displayed in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio as follows: A Right-click on "32: MMD15-5A3" to have access to MOVMOT startup and diagnostics tools in the context menu. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 85

86 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters 8.3 Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters The basic functionality of the MOVMOT drive can be expanded by using individual parameters. NFORMATON This "Expert" startup is only possible if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and parameter P85 Startup mode = "Expert" Proceed as follows: 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 83) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Perform "Easy" startup according to section Connect the PC or the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5) or section "DBG keypad connection" (page 49). 4. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 5. When using the PC, start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter, see section "ntegrating MOVMOT in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio" (page 85). 6. n the "startup"/"parameter tree" context menu, set parameter P85 startup mode to "Expert". 7. Specify the parameters you want to change. 8. Check whether these parameters depend on mechanical controls. See section "Parameters that depend on mechanical controls" (page 111). 9. Deactivate the respective controls by adjusting the bit-coded selection box of parameter P12. See section "Parameter 12" (page 11). 1.Change the selected parameters. For information on parameter setting with the DBG keypad, refer to ^section "Parameter mode" (page 22). 11.Test the functionality of the MOVMOT drive. Optimize the parameters, if required. 12.Disconnect the PC or the DBG keypad from the MOVMOT inverter. 13.Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. Missing or incorrectly installed screw plugs can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. 86 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

87 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters 8 Example: Fine adjustment of setpoint f2 using MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 83) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Perform "Easy" startup using switch f2 for rough adjustment, e.g. setting 5 (25 Hz = 75 rpm). 3. Connect the PC to the MOVMOT inverter. 4. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 5. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 6. Create a project and network. 7. Configure the communication channel at the PC. 8. Perform an online scan. A 9. Open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button and select the menu item "Startup" / "Parameter tree". 1.Set parameter P85 Startup mode to "Expert" [1] [2] 11.Open the folder "Setpoint selection" [1] Deactivate switch f2 by setting the check box of parameter P12 Deactivating mechanical controls [2] (P12:14 = "1" => parameter P12 = "1 "). 87

88 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters [1] [2] 12.Open the folder "Setpoints" [2]. Adjust parameter P161 setpoint n_f2 [1] until the application runs optimally, e.g. parameter P161 = 855 rpm (= 28.5 Hz). 13.Disconnect the PC from the MOVMOT inverter Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. 88 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

89 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Startup by transferring the set of parameters Startup by transferring the set of parameters You can startup several MOVMOT drives with the same parameter set. NOTE Transferring a parameter set is only possible between MOVMOT drives of the same type. The parameter set can only be transferred if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and a parameter set from one MOVMOT reference unit already exists Transferring the parameter set using MOVTOOLS of the DBG keypad 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 83) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Check the connection of the MOVMOT inverter. See section "Electrical nstallation". 3. Set all controls identical with those of the reference unit. 4. Connect the PC or the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5) or section "DBG keypad connection" (page 49). 5. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 6. When using a PC, start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter into MOVTOOLS. See section "ntegrating MOVMOT in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio". (page 85) 7. Transfer the entire parameter set of the MOVMOT reference unit to the MOVMOT inverter. To transfer the parameter set with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio change to the "Startup"/"Data storage" context menu. For information on transferring the parameter set with the DBG keypad, refer to section "Copying function of the DBG keypad" (page 29). 8. Test the functionality of the MOVMOT drive. 9. Disconnect the PC or the DBG keypad from the MOVMOT inverter. 1.Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 89

90 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list 8.5 Parameter list No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling Display values _ Process values 8318 Speed (signed) [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm Frequency (signed) [Hz] 1 digit =.1 Hz Output current (value) [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N Active current (signed) [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N Motor utilization [%] 1 digit =.1% DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V Output current [A] 1 digit =.1 A 1_ Status displays nverter status [Text] Operating state [Text] Error status [Text] Startup mode [Text] Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h DP switch setting S1, S2 [Bit field] Setting switch f2,1,2, Setting switch t1,1,2, 1 2_ Analog setpoints Setting setpoint potentiometer f1 1 1 digit =.1 5_ Binary outputs Bit 1 Setting output X1 [Bit field] 7_ Unit data Unit type [Text] Rated output current [A] 1 digit =.1 A DM slot option [Text] DM data set Part number DM data set DM data set version DM data set version AS-interface option : Not installed 1: MLK3A 2: MLK31A AS-nterface firmware Firmware part number of the AS-nterface AS-nterface firmware version Firmware version of the AS-nterface Basic unit firmware Part number and version of the basic unit Deactivating mechanical control elements [Bit field] (display value) Operating mode [Text] - 1 Motor type [Text] Nominal voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V Rated frequency [Hz] 1 digit =.1 Hz Nominal speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm Rated power [kw] 1 digit =.1 kw Brake type [Text] 9 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

91 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list 8 No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling 8_ Error memory 8 Error t- Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 934 Error subcode 8883 nternal error 8381 X1 [Bit field] 8391 nverter status [Text] 8396 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 841 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 846 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8411 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8416 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8421 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8426 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8431 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 81 Error t-1 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 935 Error subcode 8884 nternal error 8382 X1 [Bit field] 8392 nverter status [Text] 8397 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 842 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 847 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8412 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8417 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8422 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8427 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8432 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 82 Error t-2 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 936 Error subcode 8885 nternal error 8383 X1 [Bit field] 8393 nverter status [Text] 8398 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 843 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 848 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8413 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8418 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8423 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8428 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8433 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 91

92 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name 83 Error t-3 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 937 Error subcode 8886 nternal error 8384 X1 [Bit field] 8394 nverter status [Text] 8399 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 844 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 849 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8414 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8419 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8424 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8429 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8434 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 84 Error t-4 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 938 Error subcode 8887 nternal error 8385 X1 [Bit field] 8395 nverter status [Text] MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) 84 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 845 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 841 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8415 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 842 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8425 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 843 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8435 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 9_ Bus diagnostics 94/97 AS-nterface monitor 8455 AS-nterface output bit DO [Bit field bit 9] CW/stop AS-nterface output bit DO1 [Bit field bit 1] CCW/stop AS-nterface output bit DO2 [Bit field, bit 11] speed f2 / speed f1 AS-nterface output bit DO3 [Bit field bit 6] Reset/controller enable AS-nterface output bit P1 [Bit field bit 12] Parameter bit 1 AS-nterface output bit P2 [Bit field bit 13] Parameter bit 2 AS-nterface output bit P3 [Bit field bit 14] Parameter bit 3 AS-nterface output bit P4 [Bit field bit 15] Parameter bit 4 AS-nterface output bit D2 [Bit field bit 2] sensor output 1 AS-nterface input bit D3 [Bit field bit 3] sensor output AS-nterface input bit D [Bit field bit ] ready signal AS-nterface input bit D1 [Bit field bit 1] automatic/manual operation MOVLNK scaling 92 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

93 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list 8 No. 1 ndex dec. Subindex dec. Setpoints/ramp generators Name 1_ Setpoint selection Deactivating mechanical control elements MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) [Bit field] Default: MOVLNK scaling 13_ Speed ramps Ramp t11 up [s] 1 digit =.1 s (Switch t1) 1) Ramp t11 down [s] 1 digit =.1 s (Switch t1) 1) Ramp t12 up = down [s] 1 digit =.1 s S pattern t12 : OFF 1: Level 1 2: Level 2 3: Level Stop ramp t [s] 1 digit =.1 s 16_ Setpoints Setpoint n_f rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Setpoint n_f rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Active scaling factor (Display value) Motor setpoint speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factors changed YES / NO (Display value) Scaling factors factory settings YES / NO Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 93

94 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list No. 3 ndex dec. Subindex dec. Motor parameters Name 3_ Limits Start/stop speed rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Minimum speed 6 36 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Maximum speed 3 36 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Current limit 16 [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 32_ Motor adjustment Automatic adjustment : OFF 1: ON Boost 1 [%] 1 digit =.1% xr adjustment 1 [%] 1 digit =.1% Premagnetization 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Slip compensation 5 [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm No-load vibration damping : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S1/8) 1) 34_ Motor protection Motor protection : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S1/5) 1) Type of cooling : Fan cooled 1: Forced cooling Motor cable length 15 [m] 1 digit = 1 m 5 Monitoring functions 5_ Speed monitoring Speed monitoring : OFF 3: Motor/regenerative (DP switch S2/4) 1) Delay time [s] 1 digit =.1 s 52_ Mains OFF monitoring Mains phase failure monitoring Deactivating the mains phase failure check in unfavorable operating conditions can damage the unit. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) : OFF 1: ON MOVLNK scaling Mains off monitoring : Operation on three-phase mains supply 1: Operation with MOVTRANS 7 Control functions 7_ Operating modes Operating mode : VFC 2: VFC hoist 3: VFC DC braking 21: V/f characteristic curve 22: V/f + DC braking (DP switch S2/3) 1) 71_ Standstill current Standstill current 5% Mot 1 digit =.1 % Mot 94 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

95 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter list 8 No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name 72_ Setpoint stop function Setpoint stop function : OFF 1: ON Stop setpoint 3 5 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Start offset 3 5 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm 73_ Brake function Brake release time 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Brake application time.2 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Activation of brake release without drive enable : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S2/2) 1) 77_ Energy-saving function Energy-saving function : OFF 1: ON 8 Unit functions 8_ Setup Factory setting : No factory setting 2: Delivery state Parameter lock : OFF 1: ON Startup mode : Easy 1: Expert 81_ Serial communication RS-485 timeout interval [s] (only display) 1 digit =.1 s 83_ Error responses Motor overload error response : No response 1: Display error 2: mmediate stop / Locking 4: Rapid stop / locking 12: Normal stop / locking 84_ Reset behavior Manual reset : No 1: Yes 86_ Modulation PWM frequency : 4 khz 1: 8 khz 3: 16 khz (DP switch S1/7) 1) 1) The parameter value depends on the setting of the controls. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 95

96 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8.6 Parameter description Display values Parameter Speed (signed) The displayed speed is the calculated actual speed. Parameter 2 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 1 Frequency (signed) Output frequency of the inverter Output current (amount) Apparent current in range...2% of the rated unit current Active current (signed) Active current in range -2%...+2% of the rated unit current The sign of the active current depends on the direction of rotation and the type of load: Direction of Load Speed Active current rotation CW rotation Motor Positive (n > ) Positive ( W > ) CCW rotation Motor Negative (n < ) Negative ( W < ) CW rotation Regenerative Positive (n > ) Negative ( W < ) CCW rotation Regenerative Negative (n < ) Positive ( W > ) Motor utilization Motor utilization in [%], calculated using a motor temperature model DC link voltage Voltage in [V] measure in the DC link Output current Apparent current in [A] nverter status nverter statuses NHBTED ENABLED 96 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

97 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 16 Operating state The following operating states are possible: 24 V OPERATON CONTROLLER NHBT NO ENABLE STANDSTLL CURRENT ENABLE FACTORY SETTNG ERROR TMEOUT Error status Error status in text form Startup mode Startup mode in text form Heat sink temperature Heat sink temperature of the inverter Operating hours The total of hours in which the inverter was connected to the external DC 24 V supply Storage cycle: 15 min Enable hours Sum of hours in which the output stage of the inverter was enabled Storage cycle: 15 min Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 97

98 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Parameter 17 DP switch setting S1/ S2 Display of DP switch settings for S1 and S2: DP switch Bit in index Functionality S1/1 Bit Unit address Unit address bit 2 S1/2 Bit 1 Unit address bit 2 1 S1/3 Bit 2 Unit address bit 2 2 S1/4 Bit 3 Unit address bit 2 3 S1/5 Bit 11 Motor protection : Motor protection ON 1: Motor protection OFF S1/6 Bit 9 ncreased short-time torque : Motor adjusted 1: Motor power rating one stage smaller S1/7 Bit 12 PWM cycle frequency : 4 khz 1: Variable (16, 8, 4 khz) S1/8 Bit 13 No-load damping : Off 1: On S2/1 Bit 7 Brake type : Standard brake 1: Optional brake S2/2 Bit 15 Brake release without drive enable : Off 1: On S2/3 Bit 6 Control mode : VFC control 1: V/f control S2/4 Bit 16 Speed monitoring : Off 1: On S2/5 Bit 17 Additional function Additional function setting bit 2 S2/6 Bit 18 Additional function setting bit 2 1 S2/7 Bit 19 Additional function setting bit 2 2 S2/8 Bit 2 Additional function setting bit 2 3 The display of the DP switch setting is independent of whether the DP switch function is activated or deactivated. Parameter 18 Setting switch f2 Displays the setting of switch f2 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the switch function is activated or deactivated. Parameter 19 Setting switch t1 Displays the setting of switch t1 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the switch function is activated or deactivated. Parameter 2 Setting setpoint potentiometer f1 Displays the setting of setpoint potentiometer f1 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the potentiometer function is activated or deactivated. Parameter 51 Setting output X1 Displays the status of the output for controlling the BEM option 98 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

99 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8 Parameter 7 Parameter 71 Parameter 72 Unit type The unit type is displayed Rated output current The rated unit current is displayed in [A] DM slot option Displays the Drive D module type which is used in the Drive D module slot X3 Parameter value Type of the Drive D module No Drive-D module 1 9 Reserved 1 DT/DV/4/5 11 DZ/38/6 12 DRS/4/5 13 DRE4/5 14 DRS/46/6 15 DRE/46/6 16 DRS/DRE/38/6 (ABNT) 17 DRS/DRE/5/6 (DR global) 18 Reserved 19 DRP/4/5 2 DRP/46/ Reserved Display of the part number and the data set version on the DM module Parameter 73 Type of AS-nterface option Display of the type of the AS-nterface option Parameter value Type of AS-nterface option AS-nterface option is not available 1 MLK3A binary slave 2 MLK31A double slave Parameter index Parameter index Parameter 76 Parameter 7 Parameter index 1. Firmware part number of the AS-nterface option Display of the firmware part number of the AS-nterface option Firmware version of the AS-nterface option Display of the firmware version of the AS-nterface option Firmware basic unit Displays the part number and version of the unit firmware Operating mode The selected operating mode is displayed Motor type Display of the installed motor type (according to nameplate). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 99

100 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Parameter index Nominal voltage Display of the nominal voltage of the drive in [V] (according to nameplate). Parameter index 864. Rated frequency Display of the nominal frequency of the drive in [Hz] (according to nameplate). Parameter index Nominal speed Display of the nominal speed of the drive in [rpm] (according to nameplate). Parameter index 116. Rated power Display of the nominal power of the drive in [kw] (according to nameplate). Parameter index Brake type Display of the installed brake type (according to nameplate). Parameter 8 84 Error t- t-4 The unit saves the diagnostic data in the event of an error. The last five errors are displayed in the error memory. Parameter 94/ 97 AS-nterface monitor The parameters P94 and P97 are used as bus monitor of the AS-nterface and display the transmission of AS-nterface bits from and to the MOVMOT inverter. The following table shows the assignment of the AS-nterface output bits: ndex Subindex Bit AS-nterface bit Meaning DO CW operation/stop DO1 CCW operation/stop DO2 Speed f2/speed f DO3 Reset/controller enable P Parameter bit P1 Parameter bit P2 Parameter bit P3 Parameter bit 4 The following table shows the assignment of the AS-nterface input bits: ndex Subindex Bit AS-nterface bit Meaning 8458 D Ready signal D1 Automatic operation/manual operation D2 Sensor input D3 Sensor input 2 1 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

101 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Setpoints/ramp generators Parameter 12 Deactivating mechanical controls Use this bit-coded selection box to deactivate the mechanical controls of the MOVMOT inverter. The value of the parameter set at the factory enables all mechanical controls. Bit Meaning Note 4 Reserved 5 Deactivating the DP switch S1/5 (motor protection) Bit not set: Bit set: 6 Reserved 7 Deactivating the DP switch S1/7 (PWM cycle frequency) 8 Deactivating the DP switch S1/8 (no-load damping) 9 Reserved 1 Deactivating the DP switch S2/2 (releasing the brake) 11 Deactivating the DP switch S2/3 (operating mode) 12 Deactivating the DP switch S2/4 (Speed monitoring) 13 Deactivating the setpoint potentiometer f1 Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: 14 Deactivating switch f2 Bit not set: Switch f2 active Bit set: 15 Deactivating switch t1 Bit not set: Switch t1 active Bit set: DP switch S1/5 active DP switch S1/5 not active: Switching the motor protection function on/off using parameters DP switch S1/7 active DP switch S1/7 not active Setting the PWM cycle frequency using parameters DP switch S1/8 active DP switch S1/8 not active Activation/deactivation of no-load damping using parameters DP switch S2/2 active DP switch S2/2 not active Activation/deactivation of brake release without drive enable using parameters DP switch S2/3 active DP switch S2/3 not active Selecting the operating mode using parameters DP switch S2/4 active DP switch S2/4 not active Activation/deactivation of speed monitoring using parameters Setpoint potentiometer f1 active Setpoint potentiometer f1 not active Setting the setpoint and the maximum speed using parameters Switch f2 not active Setting the setpoint and the minimum speed using parameters Switch t1 not active Setting the ramp times using parameters Parameter 13 Ramp t11 up Acceleration ramp The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 11

102 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Parameter 131 Ramp t11 down Deceleration ramp The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Parameter 134 Ramp t12 up = down Acceleration and deceleration ramp at S pattern The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). The ramp time sets the acceleration and deceleration if parameter P135 S pattern t12 has been set to grade 1, grade 2 or grade 3. NFORMATON t is not possible to determine a setpoint via process data when parameter P135 S pattern t12 is activated. Parameter 135 S pattern t12 This parameter determines the pattern grade (1 = low, 2 = medium, 3 = high) of the ramp. The S pattern is used for rounding off the ramp and allows for a soft acceleration of the drive in the event of a setpoint change. The following figure shows the effect of the S pattern: n [1] [2] [3] [1] Setpoint selection [2] Speed without S pattern [3] Speed with S pattern NFORMATON t Once started, an S pattern phase can be interrupted with stop ramp t13. f the setpoint is reduced or the enable signal is revoked, the started S pattern phase is completed. Thus the drive can accelerate until the end of the S pattern phase despite the setpoint reduction. Parameter 136 Stop ramp t13 The stop ramp time is effective for a stop along the stop ramp. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). 12 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

103 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8 Parameter 16 Parameter 161 Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Setpoint n_f1 The setpoint n_f1 is valid if the setpoint potentiometer f1 is deactivated, i.e. when parameter P12:13 = "1" and the AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "". Setpoint n_f2 The setpoint n_f2 is valid if the switch f2 is deactivated, i.e. when parameter P12:14 = "1" and the AS-nterface bit DO2 "speed f2/speed f1" = "1". Scaling factor Display of the current scaling factor for the setpoint speed. Motor setpoint speed Display of the current setpoint speed of the MOVMOT drive. Scaling factor 15 These parameter indexes are used to set the scaling factors. The scaling factors are factors of the setpoint speed. The setpoint scaling only affects the setpoint set via the setpoint potentiometer f1. The current scaling factor is determined by the parameter bits, see section "Setpoint scaling via parameter bits" (page 8). Scaling factors changed Display as to whether at least one scaling factor has been changed compared to the corresponding default value. Scaling factors factory settings You can use this parameter index to reset all the scaling factors (parameter indexes ) to their factory setting. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 13

104 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Motor parameters Parameter 3 Start/stop speed This parameter defines the smallest speed request which the inverter sends to the motor when enabled. The transition to the speed determined in the setpoint selection is made using the active acceleration ramp. When the enable signal is removed, the parameter determines the frequency as of which the MOVMOT inverter detects the motor standstill and starts to engage the brake. Parameter 31 Parameter 32 Parameter 33 Parameter 32 Parameter 321 Parameter 322 Parameter 323 Minimal speed (when switch f2 is deactivated) This parameter defines the minimum speed n min of the drive. The drive does not fall below this speed value even when the setpoint specification is slower than the minimum speed. Maximum speed (when switch f1 is deactivated) This parameter defines the maximum speed n max of the drive. The drive does not exceed this speed value even when the setpoint specification is higher than the maximum speed. f you set n min > n max, then the value set in n min applies to the minimum speed and the maximum speed. Current limit The internal current limitation is based on the apparent output current. The inverter automatically decreases the current limit internally in the field weakening range to implement stall protection for the connected motor. Automatic adjustment When the parameter is activated, the motor is calibrated each time the operating status changes to ENABLE. Boost f parameter P32 Automatic adjustment = "On", the inverter sets parameter P321 BOOST automatically. This parameter does not usually have to be set manually. n exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. xr adjustment f parameter P32 Automatic adjustment = "On", the inverter sets parameter P322 xr adjustment automatically. Only specialists are permitted to change this parameter manually to optimize the settings. Pre-magnetization The pre-magnetization time allows for a magnetic field is built up in the motor when the inverter is enabled. 14 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

105 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8 Parameter 324 Parameter 325 Parameter 34 Parameter 341 Parameter 347 Slip compensation Slip compensation increases the speed accuracy of the motor. Enter the rated slip of the connected motor as a manual entry. The slip compensation is designed for a ratio smaller than 1 for load moment of inertia to motor moment of inertia. f control starts oscillating, you must reduce the slip compensation or set it to, if required. No-load vibration damping (when DP switch S1/8 is deactivated) No-load vibration damping can be activated when the motor tends to be unstable under no-load conditions. Motor protection (when DP switch S1/5 is deactivated) Activation / deactivation of the thermal protection model for MOVMOT When this function is activated, MOVMOT takes over the thermal protection of the drive by electronic means. Type of cooling This parameter is used for defining the cooling type (fan cooled or forced cooling) that is the basis for calculating the motor temperature. Motor cable length This parameter is used for defining the motor cable length (= cable length of the SEW hybrid cable between MOVMOT inverter and motor) that is the basis for calculating the motor temperature. This parameter must only be changed if the unit is installed close to the motor. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 15

106 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Control functions Parameter 5 Speed monitoring (when DP switch S2/4 is deactivated) With MOVMOT, speed monitoring is performed by evaluating operation at the current limit. Speed monitoring is triggered when the current limit is maintained for the duration of the set deceleration time (parameter P51). Parameter 51 Parameter 522 Delay time The set current limit can be reached during acceleration, deceleration, or load peaks. You can prevent the speed monitoring from responding too sensitively by setting the deceleration time. The current limit must be maintained for the duration of the set deceleration time before monitoring responds. Mains phase failure check Deactivate this monitoring function to prevent the mains phase failure check from triggering with unsymmetrical supply systems. NOTCE Deactivating the mains phase failure check in unfavorable operating conditions can damage the unit. Parameter 523 Mains off monitoring Use this parameter to adjust the mains off monitoring function of the inverter for operation with MOVTRANS. 16 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

107 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Control functions Parameter 7 Operating mode (when DP switch S2/3 is deactivated) This parameter is used to set the basic operating mode of the inverter. VFC / V/f characteristic curve: Default setting for asynchronous motors. This setting is suitable for general applications such as conveyor belts, trolleys, etc. VFC hoist: The hoisting function automatically provides all functions necessary for operating a simple hoist application. For the hoist function to be performed correctly, the motor brake must be controlled using the inverter. The VFC hoist operating mode affects the following parameters: No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name Value P Start/stop speed = 6 rpm f the start/stop speed is set to less than 6 rpm. P Minimum speed = 6 rpm f the minimum speed is set to less than 6 rpm P Current limit = Rated motor current f the current limit is set to a lower value than the rated motor current P Premagnetization = 2 ms f pre-magnetization is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Speed monitoring = 3: Motor/regenerative P Brake release time = 2 ms f the brake release time is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Brake application time = 2 ms f the brake application time is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Activation of brake release without drive enable = : OFF n VFC hoist operating mode, the MOVMOT inverter checks whether the values of these parameters are permitted. The speed monitoring function cannot be deactivated in VFC hoist operating mode. The function "Brake release without drive enable" cannot be activated in VFC hoist operating mode. VFC DC braking / V/f DC braking: This setting means the asynchronous motor brakes by using current injection. The motor brakes without braking resistor on the inverter. DANGER With DC braking, guided stops are not possible and certain ramp values cannot be observed. Severe or fatal injuries. Use a different operating mode. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 17

108 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Parameter 71 Standstill current When the standstill current function is activated, the inverter injects a current in the motor at standstill. The standstill current fulfills the following functions: When the ambient temperature of the motor is low, the standstill current prevents the risk of condensation and freezing of the brake. Set the current level in such a way that the motor will not overheat. f you have activated the standstill current, you can enable the motor without premagnetization. When the standstill function is activated, the output stage remains enabled even in the "NO ENABLE" status to inject the motor standstill current. n the event of an error, the motor might no longer be energized depending on the error response. DANGER A communication timeout does not interrupt the standstill current. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least one minute before opening the wiring space of MOVMOT or the connected drive, or touching the plug connector contacts. 18 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

109 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description 8 Parameters Setpoint stop function Stop setpoint Start offset f the setpoint stop function is activated, the inverter is enabled when the speed setpoint is larger than the stop setpoint + start offset. nverter enable is revoked when the speed setpoint falls below the stop setpoint. ntegrator setpoint Stop setpoint Start offset Start setpoint Speed setpoint Parameter 731 Parameter 732 Parameter 738 Parameter 77 Brake release time This parameter is used for defining how long the motor is to run at minimum speed after pre-magnetization ends. This time is necessary for opening the brake completely. Brake release reaction time You can use this parameter to set the time required for the mechanical brake to apply. Activation of brake release without drive enable (when DP switch S2/2 is deactivated) f this parameter is set to the value "ON", the brake can be released even if the drive is not enabled, see section "Data AS-nterface master -> MOVMOT " (page 79). This functionality is only available when the motor brake is controlled via the inverter. The brake is always applied when the unit is not ready for operation. The brake cannot be released when the drive is not enabled in conjunction with the hoisting function. Energy-efficiency function f this parameter is set to "OFF", the inverter reduces the no-load current Unit functions Parameter 82 Factory setting Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 19

110 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description f you set this parameter to "Delivery state", all parameters that have a factory setting and can not be set using DP switches S1/S2 or switches t1/f2 are reset to their factory setting value. For those parameters that can be set at the DP switches S1/S2 or at switches t1/f1 - during "Easy" startup, the setting of the mechanical setting element becomes active when the factory setting "Delivery state" is selected. Parameter 83 Parameter lock f this parameter is set to "ON", you cannot change any of the parameters except the parameter lock. This setting makes sense once you have finished starting up the unit and optimizing the parameters. You can only change the parameters again when this parameter is set to "OFF". Parameter 85 Startup mode Parameterization of the startup mode "Easy" When selecting "Easy" mode, DP switches S1, S2 and switches f2, t1 are used for starting up MOVMOT quickly and easily. "Expert" "Expert" mode includes additional parameters. Parameter 812 RS-485 timeout interval Display of the timeout monitoring time of the RS-485 interface. Parameter 832 Motor overload error response Use this parameter to determine the error response that is performed in the event of a motor overload (error code 84). Parameter 84 Manual reset f an error is present at the MOVMOT inverter, you can acknowledge the error by setting this parameter to "ON". Once the error has been reset, the parameter is set automatically to "OFF" again. f the power section does not indicate an error, setting the parameter to "ON" has no effect. Parameter 86 PWM frequency (when DP switch S1/7 is deactivated) You can use this parameter to set the nominal cycle frequency at the inverter output. The cycle frequency can change automatically depending on the unit utilization. 11 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

111 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Parameters that depend on mechanical controls The following mechanical controls influence the user parameters: DP switch S1 DP switch S2 Setpoint potentiometer f1 Switch f2 Switch t1 Mechanical control DP switch S1/5 DP switch S1/7 DP switch S1/8 DP switch S2/2 DP switch S2/3 DP switch S2/4 Setpoint potentiometer f1 Switch f2 nfluenced Parameters P34 Motor protection P86 PWM frequency P325 No-load vibration damping P738 Brake release without drive enable P7 Operating mode P5 Speed monitoring P32 Maximum speed P31 Minimum speed Effect of parameter P12 Bit 5 Bit not set: Activating/deactivating the motor protection function at DP switch S1/5 Bit not set: Activating/deactivating the motor protection function using parameters 7 Bit not set: Selecting the PWM frequency at DP switch S1/7 Bit set: Selecting the PWM frequency using parameters 8 Bit not set: Activating/deactivating the no-load vibration damping function at DP switch S1/8 Bit set: Activation/deactivation of the no-load vibration damping function via parameters 1 Bit not set: Activating/deactivating the function "Brake release without drive enable" at DP switch S2/2 Bit set: Activation/deactivation of the function "Brake release without drive enable" using parameters 11 Bit not set: Selecting the operating mode at DP switch S2/3 Bit set: Selecting the operating mode using parameters 12 Bit not set: Activating/deactivating the speed monitoring function at DP switch S2/4 Bit set: Activation/deactivation of speed monitoring using parameters 13 Bit not set: Setting the maximum speed at setpoint potentiometer f1 Bit set: Setting the maximum speed using parameters 14 Bit not set: Setting the minimum speed at switch f2 Bit set: Setting the minimum speed using parameters Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 111

112 8 MOVMOT with Binary Slave Startup in "Expert" Mode Parameter description Mechanical control Switch t1 nfluenced Parameters P13 Acceleration ramp P131 Deceleration ramp Effect of parameter P12 Bit 15 Bit not set: Setting the ramps at switch t1 Bit set: Setting the ramps using parameters 112 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

113 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave mportant notes on startup 9 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave NFORMATON Startup with the double slave only makes sense in "Expert" mode. Startup in "Expert" mode is only possible if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and parameter P85 Startup mode = "Expert" 9.1 mportant notes on startup DANGER Before removing / fitting the MOVMOT inverter, you must disconnect it from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to one minute after disconnection from the power supply. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. NFORMATON Remove paint protection cap from the status LED and the two AS-nterface LEDs before startup. Remove paint protection film from the nameplates before startup. Check that all protective covers are installed correctly. Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 seconds for the mains contactor K11. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 113

114 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave MLK31A double slave functional description 9.2 MLK31A double slave functional description Functional principle An AS-nterface master according to the AS-nterface specification 3., rev. 2 in conjunction with the M4 master profile is required for controlling the MLK31A double slave. On delivery, the MLK31A option has address and profile S-7.A.7.7. f you set an address >, the MLK31A option turns into a double slave with profiles S-7.A.7.7 (A slave) and S-7.A.F.5 (B slave). You must not connect more than 31 of those slaves to one AS-nterface branch A slave, meaning of the AS-nterface data and parameter bits The AS-nterface master transfers data bits and parameter bits to the MLK31A option (A slave). The MLK31A option forwards 4 data bits and 3 parameter bits without interpretation to the MOVMOT inverter via the RS-485 communication. The MOVMOT inverter contains several function modules (assignment tables) that assign specific drive functions to the data bits. For information on the assignment of functions, refer to section "Function modules" (page 125). Parameter bits 3 of the acyclic parameter bits (P2 P) are used for switching between the individual function modules and determine the meaning of the data bits. n the extended address mode, the 4. parameter bit is not available for the user. The parameter selection between the function modules is also possible during operation with the MOVMOT inverter enabled. The meaning of the data bits can change. The parameter input bits are not used. Data bits The following table show the assignment of the binary input data bits of the A slave (cycle time: max 1 ms): Parameter bits (A slave) (P2 P1 P bin ) Function module bin. hex Function of the input data bits (A slave) Bit 4 (D3) 1 bin 111 bin 2 hex 7 hex Status Sensor 2 Bit 3 (D2) Status Sensor 1 Bit 2 (D1) Bit 1 (D) MOVMOT status according to Section "Description of the data bits, function modules" (page 126) bin 1 bin hex 1 hex MOVMOT status according to Section "Description of the data bits, function modules" (page 126) The parameter bits P2 P are used for selecting the function modules. When function modules 2 hex 7 hex are selected, data bits D and D1 are transmitted from the slave to the master according to the MOVMOT status word. The data bits D2 and D3 contain the status of the sensor inputs D2 and D3. When function modules hex 1 hex are selected, all 4 data bits D D3 are transmitted from the slave to the master according to the MOVMOT status word. The status of the sensor inputs is not transmitted. 114 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

115 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave MLK31A double slave functional description Function of the B slave The B slave is used for the transmission of several status and control words between the AS-nterface master and the MOVMOT inverter. The serial AS-nterface data transmission (analog profile) allows for MOVMOT parameters and display values to be written and read. According to profile S-7.A.F.5, the AS-nterface master acyclically transfers several data bytes to the MLK31A option (B slave). The microcontroller of the MLK31A option processes those signals and transfers them via the to the RS-485 interface of the MOVMOT according to the MOVLNK protocol (parameter telegram). The MOVMOT inverter transfers the response telegram to the MLK31A option via the RS-485 interface. The MLK31A option converts the response telegram and transfers it to the AS-nterface master via the serial AS-nterface connection (analog profile). For the communication via the RS-485 interface, the acyclical parameter transmission of the B slave has higher priority than the cyclical control word of the A slave. Due to the cycle time on the AS-nterface, at least one process data protocol is performed between the parameter transmissions. Communication via the B slave is always performed acyclically. The parameter transmission via the internal RS-485 interface requires a corresponding parameter call of the AS-nterface master in conjunction with a higher-level controller. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 115

116 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Description of the controls 9.3 Description of the controls DP switches S1 and S2 DP switch S1: S Meaning Binary encoding RS-485 unit address Motor protection ON Off OFF On Motor power rating Motor one size smaller Motor adjusted PWM Frequency Variable (16,8,4 khz) No-load damping On 4 khz Off DP switch S2: S Meaning Brake type Release brake none Enable ON OFF NOTCE Optional brake Standard brake Operating mode Speed monitoring Binary encoding additional functions On V/f On Off VFC Off Set the DP switches using suitable tools, e.g. a flat tip screwdriver with a blade width 3mm. The force used for setting the DP switches must not exceed 5 N. 116 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

117 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Description of the DP switches S Description of the DP switches S DP switches S1/1 S1/4 RS-485 address of the MOVMOT inverter Set the DP switches S1/1 - S1/4 as follows for MOVMOT with AS-nterface MLK31A: ON ON DP switch S1/5 Motor protection t is not possible to connect the TH (bimetallic thermostat). When the MOVMOT inverter is mounted close to the motor in conjunction with the MLK31A AS-nterface option, the motor protection must be activated at the DP switch S1/5 as follows: ON n order to ensure the motor protection, you have to set the motor cable length according to the length of the installed hybrid cable via parameter P347. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 117

118 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Description of the DP switches S DP switch S1/6 Lower motor power rating When activated, this DP switch enables MOVMOT to be assigned to a motor with a lower power rating. The rated unit power is not affected. When a motor with a lower power rating is used, the overload capacity of the drive can be increased because, from the perspective of the motor, MOVMOT is one power rating too big. A higher current can be provided briefly, leading to higher torque ratings. The aim of this switch S1/6 is to achieve short-term utilization of the motor's peak torque. The motor protection function is adjusted depending on the motor power and the switch setting. Stall protection for the motor is not possible in this operating mode (S1/6 = "ON"). Power Motor type MOVMOT type 23/4 V Motor in connection Motor in connection [kw] 5 Hz 1) S1/6 = OFF S1/6 = ON S1/6 = OFF S1/6 = ON.25 DFR63L4/.. - MM3D MM3D MM5D DRS71S4/TH. MM3D MM5D MM5D MM7D DRS71M4/.. MM5D MM7D MM7D MM11D DRS8S4/...75 DRE8M4/.. MM7D MM11D MM11D MM15D DRP9M4/.. DRS8M4/ DRE9M4/.. MM11D MM15D MM15D MM22D DRP9L4/.. DRS9M4/ DRE9L4/.. MM15D MM22D MM22D MM3D DRP1M4/.. DRS9L4/ DRE1M4/.. MM22D MM3D MM3D MM4D DRP1L4/.. DRS1M4/.. 3 DRE1LC4/.. MM3D MM4D MM4D DRP112M4/TH.. DRS1LC4/.. 4 DRE132S4/.. MM4D DRP132M4/.. 1) On request, SEW-EURODRVE provides the motor assignment of motors with 23/4 V, 6 Hz or 266/ 46 V, 6 Hz. 118 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

119 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Description of DP switches S DP switch S1/7 Setting the maximum PWM frequency When DP switch S1/7 is set to "OFF", the MOVMOT unit operates with 4 khz PWM frequency. When DP switch S1/7 is set to "ON", the MOVMOT unit operates with a 16 khz PWM frequency (low noise) and switches back in steps to lower switching frequencies depending on the heat sink temperature and the load DP switch S1/8 No-load vibration damping (S1/8 = "ON") This function, when activated, prevents resonance vibrations in no-load operation. 9.5 Description of DP switches S DP switch S2/1 Brake type DP switch S2/1 must only be set if the MOVMOT drive is equipped with a mechanical brake or if the BEM option is not installed. When using the standard brake, the DP switch 2/1 must be set to "OFF". When using the optional brake, the DP switch 2/1 must be set to "ON". Motor Standard brake [type] Optional brake [type] S2/1 = "OFF" S2/1 = "ON" DR.63L4 BR3 DR.71S4 BE5 BE1 DR.71M4 BE1 BE5 DR.8S4 BE1 BE5 DRE8M4 BE1 BE5 DRS8M4 BE2 BE1 DRS9M4/DRE9M4 BE2 BE1 DRP9M4 BE1 BE2 DRE9L4 BE2 BE1 DRS9L4 BE5 BE2 DRS1M4 / DRE1M4 BE5 BE2 DRP1M4 BE2 BE5 DR.1LC4 BE5 BE2 DR.1L4 BE5 BE2 DRP112M4 BE5 BE11 DR.132S4 BE5 BE11 DRP132M4 BE5 BE11 Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT type Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 1 (MM3.. to MM15..). 23 V MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 2 (MM22.. to MM4..) 12 V MOVMOT MM..D-233, size 1 and 2 (MM3.. to MM4..) 119

120 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Description of DP switches S DP switch S2/2 Brake release without enable When switch S2/2 is set to "ON", it is possible to release the brake even if there is no drive enable. This function is only available for brakemotors. This function is not available in hoist operation. Functional description Behavior if unit not ready LED display The brake release function is controlled via the data bits of the A slave, see section "Function modules" (page 125). f the unit is not ready, the brake is always engaged irrespective of the status of the data bits of the A slave. The MOVMOT status LED flashes yellow at a fast rate (t on : t off = 1 ms : 3 ms) if the brake has been released for manual movement DP switch S2/3 Operating mode DP switch S2/3 = "OFF": VFC operation for 4-pole motors DP switch S2/3 = "ON": V/f operation reserved for special cases DP switch S2/4 Speed monitoring Speed monitoring (S2/4 = "ON") protects the drive when it is blocked. f the drive is operated at the current limit for longer than 1 second when speed monitoring is active (S2/4 = "ON"), the MOVMOT inverter trips the speed monitoring. The status LED of the MOVMOT inverter signalizes the error by slowly flashing red (error code 8). This error only occurs when the current limit has been reached for the duration of the deceleration time (parameter P51) DP switches S2/5 S2/8 Additional functions For MOVMOT with the MLK31A AS-nterface option, all additional functions at DP switches S2/5 S2/8 must be deactivated as follows: ON S Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

121 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup procedure Startup procedure DANGER When working on the unit, dangerous voltage levels may still be present up to 1 minute after the mains is disconnected! Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. 1. Remove the MOVMOT inverter from the terminal box. 2. Set the desired AS-nterface address with a hand-held programming device (page 76) or with a master (see description of the AS-nterface master). 3. Check the connection of the MOVMOT inverter. See section "Electrical nstallation". 4. Set the type of 24 V supply via the switch S5 (page 78). 5. Set DP switches S1/1 S1/4 as follows: ON ON Place the MOVMOT inverter onto the terminal box and screw it on. 7. Switch on the following voltages. AS-nterface voltage DC 24 V auxiliary voltage (only for 24 V supply via the black AUX-PWR cable) Supply voltage Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 121

122 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup procedure Assigning the slave address An AS-nterface master according to the AS-nterface specification 3., rev. 2 in conjunction with the M4 master profile is required for controlling the MLK31A double slave. MOVMOT drives with MLK3.A AS-nterface option are set to address and profile S- 7.A.7.7 by default. f you set an address >, the MLK31A option turns into a double slave with profiles S-7.A.7.7 (A slave) and S-7.A.F.5 (B slave). After the address assignment, the B slave automatically assumes the base address of the A slave. You have the following options for assigning the AS-nterface address of the MOVMOT inverter with MLK3.A AS-nterface option (address 1-31): Addresses are assigned automatically within a configured AS-nterface system when replacing a MOVMOT drive with MLK31A AS-nterface option. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: The new MOVMOT drive with AS-nterface option MLK31A must have the address. f you need to replace several MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK31A, you must replace them individually (one after the other). Manual address assignment via the plant master The drives must be connected to the AS-nterface cable one after another. Doing so prevents several MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK31A from having assigned the same address. Manual address assignment using a hand-held AS-nterface programming device. Observe the notes in the next chapter when connecting the MOVMOT drives with AS-nterface option MLK31A to the AS-nterface cable. NFORMATON Observe the following notes if you change the AS-nterface address of the MLK31A AS-nterface option after the corresponding address assignment (address > ): The new address must not be used by another projected slave. The B slave must always have the same base address as the A slave. Only the address of the A slave must be set for the address assignment. After the address assignment, the B slave automatically assumes the base address of the A slave. 122 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

123 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup procedure 9 Assigning the slave address using a hand-held programming device Hand-held AS-nterface programming devices offer the following functions: Reading out and changing an AS-nterface slave address Reading out the AS-nterface profile Reading out and changing the data and parameter bits Function check and test run. Hand-held programming devices do not provide sufficient current for the operation. This is why an external voltage supply (AUX-PWR) is required for the function check and the test run. When using a hand-held programming device, you need a 2-core connection cable that fits onto the AS-interface plug connector of MOVMOT (see the following figure) : AS-nterface + 2: V24 [1] 3: AS-nterface - 4: 24V [1] [1] Do not connect pin 2 and 4 for the address assignment! NOTCE The hand-held programming device may only be connected via pins 1 "AS- nterface +" and 3 "AS-nterface -" with the AS-nterface plug connector. The handheld programming device can be damaged if not connected properly. Prior to the address assignment via a hand-held programming device, switch S5 in the MOVMOT terminal box must be set to "1"! After the address assignment you have to set the S5 according to the kind of 24 V voltage supply. Example: Disconnect the AS-nterface nodes from the AS-nterface network one at a time and assign addresses via the hand-held programming device (A). Then reconnect the respective AS-nterface node to the AS-nterface network (B). A B MOVMOT [1] [1] AS-nterface hand-held programming device Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 123

124 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup procedure Setting the 24 V supply via S5 The switch S5 [1] is located on the connection board. [1] [1] Size 1 Size [1] S5 switch Use switch S5 to set the type of 24 V supply. Switch Switch S5 = "1" 24 V voltage supply Supplying the MOVMOT using AUX PWR (e.g. black AS-nterface cable) S5 24V AS- AS BK YE Switch S5 = "" Supplying MOVMOT via the AS-nterface data cable S5 24V AS - AS YE 124 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

125 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules Function modules The drive-specific function assignment of the cyclic data bits is carried out in the MOVMOT inverter. This section describes this function assignment. The AS-nterface parameter bits P2 P are used for switching between the drive functions and determine the meaning of the data bits. The selection between the function modules is also possible during operation with the MOVMOT inverter enabled. The meaning of the data bits can change Description of the parameter bits The following table shows the function assignment of the data bits to the selected function module (AS-nterface parameter bits). AS-nterface parameter bits (A slave) (P2 P1 P bin ) bin. Function module hex Function of the data bits 111 bin 7 hex Binary mode (default), control compatible with the SEW binary slave 11 bin 6 hex Reserved 11 bin 5 hex 6 fixed setpoints with the ramps t11 up and t11 down Status reports Ramp selection between the function modules 4 hex and 5 hex 1 bin 4 hex 6 fixed setpoints with the ramps t15 up and t15 down Status reports Ramp selection between the function modules 5 hex and 4 hex 11 bin 3 hex 3 fixed setpoints with the ramps t11 up and t11 down 3 fixed setpoints with the ramps t15 up and t15 down 1 bin 2 hex Reserved 1 bin 1 hex 6 fixed setpoints with the ramps t11 up and t11 down extended diagnostics no sensor inputs bin hex Reserved When function modules 2 hex 7 hex are selected, data bits D and D1 are transmitted from the slave to the master according to the MOVMOT status word. The data bits D2 and D3 contain the status of the sensor inputs D2 and D3. When function modules hex 1 hex are selected, all 4 data bits D D3 are transmitted from the slave to the master according to the MOVMOT status word. The status of the sensor inputs is not transmitted. NFORMATON f the AS-nterface master selects the parameter bits with a reserved function, MOVMOT drive changes to "Stop". There is no feedback in this case. This is why all the input data in the MOVMOT status word is set to "" (not ready). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 125

126 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules Description of the data bits, function modules Function module 7 hex The cyclic operation with the function module 7 hex represents a function compatible with the SEW binary slave (without scaling function). The MLK31A option is like an /O module with 4 input and 4 output data bits. The MOVMOT drive is controlled via the output data bits. The output and input data bits of the A slave are assigned the following functions: Output data AS-nterface master MLK31A option Function module 7 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 111 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function DO CW/stop DO1 CCW/stop DO2 Setpoint changeover f1 / f2 DO3 Reset 1) / Controller enable 1) in the event of an edge change "" "1" (only effective in case of an error) nput data MLK31A option AS-nterface master Function module 7 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 111 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function D Ready signal : MOVMOT is not ready 1: MOVMOT is ready D1 Manual operation : MOVMOT control via AS-nterface 1: MOVMOT control via manual operation D2 Sensor input 1 : The signal of sensor 1 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 1 = "1" D3 Sensor input 2 : The signal of sensor 2 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 2 = "1" 126 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

127 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules 9 Function module 5 hex The cyclic operation with function module 5 hex allows for the selection of 6 fixed setpoints with ramps t11 up and t11 down. The output data bits are binary coded and interpreted as 16 different control codes. The output and input data bits of the A slave are assigned the following functions: Output data AS-nterface master MLK31A option Function module 5 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 11 bin ) Data bit (A slave) bin. dec. Function bin dec Stop Stop ramp t13 (P136) 1 bin 1 dec Stop/inhibit Ramp t11 down (P131) 1 bin 2 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 3 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 1 bin 4 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 5 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 6 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 7 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 1 bin 8 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 9 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 1 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 11 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 12 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 13 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 14 dec Brake release without drive enable (only if DP switch S2/1 = "ON" or parameter P738 = "ON") 1111 bin 15 dec Stop Reset (only works in case of an error) Stop ramp t13 (P136) nput data MLK31A option AS-nterface master Function module 5 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 11 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function D Ready signal : MOVMOT is not ready 1: MOVMOT is ready D1 Enable : Motor is not energized 1: Motor is energized D2 Sensor input 1 : The signal of sensor 1 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 1 = "1" D3 Sensor input 2 : The signal of sensor 2 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 2 = "1" Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 127

128 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules Function module 4 hex The cyclic operation with function module 4 hex allows for the selection of 6 fixed setpoints with ramps t15 up and t15 down. This operation is identical to the operation with function module 5 hex, however, with ramps t15 up and t15 down are used. Thus, switching between the function modules 4 hex and 5 hex realizes a switching between the ramps during operation. This ramp switchover can be used for a load-dependent optimization of the application. The output and input data bits of the A slave are assigned the following functions: Output data AS-nterface master MLK31A option Function module 4 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 1 bin ) Data bit (A slave) bin. dec. Function bin dec Stop Stop ramp t13 (P136) 1 bin 1 dec Stop/inhibit Ramp t15 down (154.11) 1 bin 2 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 3 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 1 bin 4 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 5 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 6 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 7 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 1 bin 8 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 9 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 1 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 11 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 12 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 13 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 14 dec Brake release without drive enable (only if DP switch S2/1 = "ON" or parameter P738 = "ON") 1111 bin 15 dec Stop Reset (only works in case of an error) Stop ramp t13 (P136) nput data MLK31A option AS-nterface master Function module 4 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 1 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function D Ready signal : MOVMOT is not ready 1: MOVMOT is ready D1 Enable : Motor is not energized 1: Motor is energized D2 Sensor input 1 : The signal of sensor 1 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 1 = "1" D3 Sensor input 2 : The signal of sensor 2 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 2 = "1" 128 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

129 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules 9 Function module 3 hex The cyclic operation with function module 3 hex allows for selecting 3 fixed setpoints with ramps t16 up and t16 down as well as 3 fixed setpoints with ramps t15 up and t15 down. The output data bits are binary coded and interpreted as 16 different control codes. The output and input data bits of the A slave are assigned the following functions: Output data AS-nterface master MLK31A option Function module 3 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 11 bin ) Data bit (A slave) bin. dec. Function bin dec Stop Stop ramp t13 (P136) 1 bin 1 dec Stop/inhibit Ramp t16 down (1475.1) 1 bin 2 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 11 bin 3 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 1 bin 4 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 11 bin 5 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 11 bin 6 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 111 bin 7 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramps t16 up (1475.2), t16 down (1475.1) 1 bin 8 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 9 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 1 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 11 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 11 bin 12 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 13 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramps t15 up (154.1), t15 down (154.11) 111 bin 14 dec Stop/inhibit Ramp t15 down (154.11) 1111 bin 15 dec Stop Stop ramp t13 (P136) Reset (only works in case of an error) nput data MLK31A option AS-nterface master Function module 3 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 11 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function D Ready signal : MOVMOT is not ready 1: MOVMOT is ready D1 Enable : Motor is not energized 1: Motor is energized D2 Sensor input 1 : The signal of sensor 1 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 1 = "1" D3 Sensor input 2 : The signal of sensor 2 = "" 1: The signal of sensor 2 = "1" Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 129

130 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules Function module 1 hex The cyclic operation with function module 1 hex allows for the selection of 6 fixed setpoints and an extended error diagnostics. The output data during the operation with function module 1 hex correspond to the output data during operation with function module 5 hex. The input data during operation with function module 1 hex are interpreted as different status codes. Output data AS-nterface master MLK31A option Function module 1 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 1 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function bin. dec. bin dec Stop Stop ramp t13 (P136) 1 bin 1 dec Stop/inhibit Ramp t11 down (P131) 1 bin 2 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 3 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n (P17) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 1 bin 4 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 5 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n1 (P171) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 6 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 7 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n2 (P172) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 1 bin 8 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 9 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n3 (P173) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 1 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 11 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 11 bin 12 dec CW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 13 dec CCW operation, Fixed setpoint n5 (196.39) Ramp t11 up (P13), t11 down (P131) 111 bin 14 dec Brake release without drive enable (only if DP switch S2/1 = "ON" or parameter P738 = "ON") 1111 bin 15 dec Stop Reset (only works in case of an error) Stop ramp t13 (P136) 13 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

131 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Function modules 9 nput data MLK31A option AS-nterface master Function module 1 hex (AS-interface parameter bits = 1 bin ) Data bit (A slave) Function bin. dec. bin dec Not ready 1 bin 1 dec Ready for operation automatic mode 1 bin 2 dec Ready for operation manual mode 11 bin 3 dec Enable/motor running automatic mode 1 bin 4 dec Enable/motor running manual mode 11 bin 5 dec Reserved 11 bin 6 dec Reserved 111 bin 7 dec Reserved 1 bin 8 dec Error, DC link voltage too high Error code 7 11 bin 9 dec Phase failure error Error code 6 11 bin 1 dec Error, overcurrent output stage Error code bin 11 dec Error, thermal overload output stage Error code bin 12 dec Error, thermal overload motor Error code bin 13 dec Error, thermal overload brake coil Error code bin 14 dec Speed monitoring error Error code bin 15 dec Other error Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 131

132 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 9.8 MOVTOOLS MotionStudio The "MOVTOOLS MotionStudio" software package is the SEW engineering tool that you can use to access all SEW drive units. With simple applications, you can use the MOVTOOLS MotionStudio to perform diagnostics for the MOVMOT inverter. For more demanding applications, you can use the wizards available in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio to startup and configure MOVMOT inverters. The scope function in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio can be used for visualizing process values. nstall the latest software version of MOVTOOLS MotionStudio on your PC. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio can communicate with the drive units using different communication links and fieldbus systems. The following section describes the most straightforward application, a connection between a PC / laptop and a MOVMOT inverter via the diagnostics interface X5 (pointto-point connection). 132 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

133 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave MOVTOOLS MotionStudio ntegrating MOVMOT into MOVTOOLS MotionStudio NFORMATON For a detailed description of the following steps, please refer to the comprehensive online help in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 1. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 2. Create a project and network. 3. Configure the communication channel at the PC. 4. Make sure that the voltage supply of the MOVMOT inverter is connected. 5. Perform an online scan. NFORMATON The diagnostic interface is always assigned address 32. Adjust the scan range in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio in such a way that address 32 is also scanned. The baud rate is 9.6 kbaud. The online scan can take some time. 6. MOVMOT, for example, is displayed in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio as follows: A Right-click on "32: MMD15-5A3" to have access to MOVMOT startup and diagnostics tools in the context menu. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 133

134 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters 9.9 Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters The basic functionality of the MOVMOT drive can be expanded by using individual parameters. NFORMATON This "Expert" startup is only possible if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and parameter P85 Startup mode = "Expert" Proceed as follows: 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 113) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Connect the PC or the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5) or section "DBG keypad connection" (page 49). 3. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 4. When using the PC, start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter, see section "ntegrating MOVMOT in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio" (page 133). 5. n the "startup"/"parameter tree" context menu, set parameter P85 startup mode to "Expert". 6. Specify the parameters you want to change. 7. Check whether these parameters depend on mechanical controls. See section "Parameters that depend on mechanical controls" (page 187). 8. Deactivate the respective controls by adjusting the bit-coded selection box of parameter P12. See section "Parameter 12" (page 177). 9. Change the selected parameters. For information on parameter setting with the DBG keypad, refer to section "Parameter mode" (page 22). 1.Test the functionality of the MOVMOT drive. Optimize the parameters, if required. 11.Disconnect the PC or the DBG keypad from the MOVMOT inverter. 12.Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. Missing or incorrectly installed screw plugs can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. 134 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

135 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters 9 Example: Fine adjustment of setpoint f2 using MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 113) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Connect the PC to the MOVMOT inverter. 3. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 4. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. 5. Create a project and network. 6. Configure the communication channel at the PC. 7. Perform an online scan. A 8. Open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button and select the menu item "Startup" / "Parameter tree". 9. Set parameter P85 Startup mode to "Expert" [1] [2] 1.Open the folder "Setpoint selection" [1] Deactivate switch f2 by setting the check box of parameter P12 Deactivating mechanical controls [2] (P12:14 = "1" => parameter P12 = "1 "). Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 135

136 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup and adding functions by setting individual parameters [1] [2] 11.Open the folder "Setpoints" [2]. Adjust parameter P161 setpoint n_f2 [1] until the application runs optimally, e.g. parameter P161 = 855 rpm (= 28.5 Hz). 12.Disconnect the PC from the MOVMOT inverter Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. 136 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

137 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Startup by transferring the parameter set Startup by transferring the parameter set You can startup several MOVMOT drives with the same parameter set. NFORMATON Transferring a parameter set is only possible between MOVMOT drives of the same type. The parameter set can only be transferred if: No additional function is activated (DP switch S2/5 - S2/8 = "OFF") The Drive D module is plugged in and a parameter set from one MOVMOT reference unit already exists Transferring the parameter set via MOVTOOLS 1. t is essential to observe the safety and warning instructions of section "mportant notes on startup" (page 113) when working on the MOVMOT inverter. 2. Check the connection of the MOVMOT inverter. See section "Electrical nstallation". 3. Set all controls identical with those of the reference unit. 4. Connect the PC to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5). 5. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 6. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter in MOVTOOLS. See section "ntegrating MOVMOT in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio". (page 85) 7. Transfer the entire parameter set of the MOVMOT reference unit to the MOVMOT inverter. To transfer the parameter set with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio change to the "Startup"/"Data storage" context menu. 8. Test the functionality of the MOVMOT drive. 9. Disconnect the PC from the MOVMOT inverter. 1.Make sure the screw plug of the diagnostics interface X5 has a seal and screw it in. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 137

138 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9.11 Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface MOVLNK parameter channel The MOVLNK parameter channel enables access to all drive parameters of the MOVMOT inverter, regardless of the bus in use. t is also used for parameter access of the AS-nterface master to the MOVMOT inverter via the MLK31A AS-nterface slave. The following figure shows the components of the MOVLNK parameter channel: Byte Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Management Subindex ndex High ndex Low Data MSB Data Data Data LSB The request and response frame of the MOVLNK parameter channel have the same structure. Management byte The management byte coordinates the parameterization process. t provides important service parameters of the service executed. Management byte Bit Meaning Value 3 Service executed bin : No service 1 bin : Read parameter 1 bin : Write parameter 11 bin : Write parameter volatile 11 bin : Read default All other services are not used in conjunction with MOVMOT the MLK31A option. 4 5 Length of the data/error bytes 11 bin : 4 bytes 6 Handshake bit : not used in conjunction with MOVMOT with the MLK31A option 7 Status bit : No error during service execution 1: Error during service execution, see bytes 4 7 Bits 3 determine the service to be executed. Bits 4 and 5 determine the data length of the write service. The handshake bit 6 is used as an acknowledgement bit for cyclic transmission. This bit is not used for the parameter transmission with the MLK31A option. Status bit 7 indicates whether the service was carried out properly or if errors occurred. ndex addressing Data range Byte 1 / subindex, byte 2 / index High, and byte 3 / index Low determine the parameter to be read via the parameter channel. The parameters of the inverter are addressed using the same index in all communication interfaces. The data is located in bytes 4 7 of the MOVLNK parameter channel. Thus, a maximum of 4 bytes per service can be transmitted via the parameter channel. The data is always entered with right-justification; that is, byte 7 contains the least significant data byte (Data LSB) whereas byte 4 is the most significant data byte (Data MSB). 138 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

139 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 ncorrect service execution f there an error occurs during a service execution, status bit 7 in the management byte is set to "1". f status bit 7 signals an error, the structured error code is send back to the data range (byte 4 7) of the response telegram. Byte Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Management Subindex ndex High ndex Low Error class Error class Add. code High Add. code Low Status bit = 1: incorrect execution of a service The following table shows the values and their meaning for the elements "Error-Class", "Error-Code", "Additional Code High" and "Additional Code Low": Element Value Meaning/note Error class x8 Error type according to EN 517 For MOVMOT with MLK31A, the error class is = x8. Error code x Error code For MOVMOT with MLK31A, the error code is = x. Additional code High: Additional code Low: x For MOVMOT with MLK31A, the additional code Low is = x. x / x1 / 16 x11 / 17 x12 / 18 x13 / 19 x15 / 21 x16 / 22 x1b / 27 x1c / 28 x1d / 29 No error llegal index Function/parameter not implemented Read-only access Parameter lock activated Value of the parameter too high Value of the parameter too low Parameter protected against access Controller inhibit required in order to be able to change the parameter. nvalid parameter value Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 139

140 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface CTT2 protocol via AS-nterface You can use the MLK31A double slave to exchange MOVLNK parameters between an AS-nterface master and a MOVMOT inverter. The B slave with slave profile S-7.A.F.5 uses the CTT2 protocol. For a description of the profile, refer to the appendix of the "Complete AS-nterface Specification Version 3., Revision 2, July 9, 28". Telegram runtimes System-related telegram runtimes occur during the data exchange between the MOVMOT B slave and the AS-nterface master via the CTT2 protocol. Those runtimes predominantly depend on the number of slaves in the AS-nterface network. The following diagram shows the connection between the the telegram runtime and the number of AS-nterface slave addresses during the transmission of a MOVLNK parameter: t [s] 4, 3 2,7 2 1,4 1, N t N Telegram runtime Number of AS-nterface address n practice, SEW-EURODRVE recommends to add a safety factor to those values. The control of the MOVMOT inverter via the cyclical data bits of the A slave continues even during the parameter transmission of the B slave. 14 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

141 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 CTT2 services The MLK31A double slave supports the following acyclical services and the corresponding response telegrams of the CTT2 protocol: Code Service/ Response telegram followed by Recommended use hex dec. x1 hex 16 dec Read request ndex, length Reading out: x5 ndex "x hex " = "D object" hex 8 dec Read response OK Data ndex "x1 hex " = "diagnosis" x9 hex 144 dec Read response not OK Standard error code x11 hex 17 dec Write request ndex, length, data x51 hex 81 dec Write response OK x91 hex 145 dec Write response not OK Standard error code x1d hex 29 dec Exchange request ndex Length when reading Length when writing read data written data x5d hex 93 dec Exchange response OK read data x9d hex 157 dec Exchange response not OK Error object Parameterization MOVMOT inverter ndex "x2 hex " = "MOVLNK parameter channel" n order to check the communication between the AS-nterface master and the AS-nterface slave, SEW-EURODRVE recommends to read out the "D object" with the "Read request" service. The indexes x hex "D object" and x1 hex "diagnosis" are only permitted in conjunction with the CTT2 service "Read request" x1 hex. For parameterization of the MOVMOT inverter, use the "Exchange Request" service. Alternatively you may use the "Write Request" and "Read Request" services for parameterization. However, you have to program fixed wait times when you program the higher-level controller in order to compensate the telegram runtimes. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 141

142 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface The following sections describe the individual CTT2 services. A prerequisite for the transmission of the MOVMOT parameters via the CTT2 services is the basic understanding of the CTT2 and the MOVLNK protocol. Reading out an D object n order to check the flawless communication between AS-nterface master and the MLK31A option, read out the D object with the "Read request" service. Select index x hex and length x6 hex. f this service is transmitted to the double slave correctly, the MLK31A double slave replies with the response telegram x5 hex "Read response OK" and the data. n the event of an error, the MLK31A double slave sends the response telegram x9 hex "Read response not OK" (for the error code, refer to the AS-nterface specification). "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x x6 Code x1 = ndex x = Length X6 = Read request D object Length of the D object The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Vendor D High Vendor D Low Device D High Device D Low Output/input Firmware version x5 x xa x xa x x1 Code x5 = Read response OK Vendor D High x = High value of the vendor D Vendor D Low xa = Low value of the vendor D => Vendor D = xa hex = 1 dec. Device D High x = High value of the device D Device D Low xa = Low value of the device D => Device D = xa hex = 1 dec. Output/input x = No inputs and outputs Firmware version x1 142 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

143 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 MOVLNK parameter exchange with "Exchange request" Executing the CTT2 service "Exchange request" x1d, the AS-nterface master sends a telegram with the MOVMOT parameter data to the double slave and receives the response data immediately with the response telegram. Select index x2 hex and length x8 hex. f this service has been executed correctly, the MLK31A double slave sends the response telegram x5d hex "Exchange response OK" and the read data. n the event of an error, the MLK31A double slave sends the response telegram x9d hex "Exchange response not OK" (for the error code, refer to the AS-nterface specification). f the response data of the MOVMOT inverter are not available yet, the MLK31A double slave sends a response with error code "Busy" = "4" after the read access. Example: Changing the fixed setpoint value n4 (196.38) to 1 rpm: "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x32 x26 x27 x7 x xf x42 x4 Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x26 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data xf Data x42 Data LSB x4 Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Write parameter Subindex of parameter fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) 38 dec = x26 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. The internal scaling of the MOVMOT inverter is 1 times higher than the real scaling. The scaling factor then is 1 dec = xf424. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 143

144 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x32 x26 x27 x7 x x x x Code x5d = Management x32 = Subindex x26 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request OK Write parameter Subindex of parameter fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) 38 hex = x26 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data value is dec = x 144 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

145 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 MOVLNK Parameter exchange with "Write request" and "Read request" Alternatively, for the MOVLNK parameter exchange, you can also use the "Write request" and "Read request" service instead of the recommended "Exchange request". "Write request" Execute the CTT2 service x11 hex "Write request" in order to read and write a MOVMOT parameter. Select index x2 hex. Select length x8 hex. This is the length of a MOVLNK frame in bytes. f this service is transmitted to the double slave correctly, the MLK31A double slave replies with the response telegram x51 hex "Read response OK". f an error occurs or if an incorrect index or length have been selected, the MLK31A double slave sends the response telegram x91 hex "Write response not OK" instead (for the error code, refer to the AS-nterface specification). Example: Changing the fixed setpoint value n4 (196.38) to 1 rpm: "Write request" service: CTT2 service MOVLNK protocol Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x26 x27 x7 x xf x42 x4 Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x26 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data xf Data x42 Data LSB x4 Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) 38 dec = x26 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. The internal scaling of the MOVMOT inverter is 1 times higher than the real scaling. The scaling factor then is 1 dec = xf424. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 145

146 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface "Read request" Once the CTT2 service "Write request" has been executed correctly, you can use the service x1 hex "Read request" to call the response telegram of the CTT2 service previously executed. Select index x2 hex and length x8 hex. f this service is transmitted to the double slave correctly, the MLK31A double slave replies with the response telegram x5 hex "Read response OK" and the data. n the event of an error, the MLK31A double slave sends the response telegram x9 hex "Read response not OK" (for the error code, refer to the AS-nterface specification). f the response data of the MOVMOT inverter are not available yet, the MLK31A double slave sends a response with error code "Busy" = "4" after the read access. The AS-nterface master must read the data again. Example: Requesting the correct response of the MOVMOT inverter from the previous change of the fixed setpoint value n4 (196.38) "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x26 x27 x7 x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x26 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter fixed setpoint n4 (196.38) 38 dec = x26 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec 146 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

147 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Use of the "Exchange request" service (example) This example illustrates how to change individual parameters of the MOVMOT inverter with the CTT2 service "Exchange request" x1d. You can use this service as an alternative to the "Read request" and "Write request" service to read or write MOVMOT parameters. First, check the communication by reading out the "D object" with the "Read request" service. Then you merely have to execute a "Request" service. The AS-nterface response telegram x5d already contains the MOVLNK response of the MOVMOT inverter. The following parameters of the MOVMOT inverter are to be changed: Ramp t11 up and t11 down to.5 s Fixed setpoint value n to 1 rpm Activation of the option to release the brake without drive enable signal (P738 = "ON") n addition, you want the heat sink temperature to be read. Checking the communication Read out the D object correctly in order to check the correct communication between the AS-nterface master and the MLK31A. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x x6 Code x1 = ndex x = Length X6 = Read request D object Length of the D object The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Vendor D High Vendor D Low Device D High Device D Low Output/input Firmware version x5 x xa x xa x x1 Code x5 = Read response OK Vendor D High x = High value of the vendor D Vendor D Low xa = Low value of the vendor D => Vendor D = xa hex = 1 dec. Device D High x = High value of the device D Device D Low xa = Low value of the device D => Device D = xa hex = 1 dec. Output/input x = No inputs and outputs Firmware version x1 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 147

148 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Activating the Expert mode in the MOVMOT inverter n order to be able to change parameters in the MOVMOT inverter, you have to activate the Expert mode once via parameter P85. "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x32 x1 x27 x6f x x x x1 Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x1 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x6f = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x1 Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Write parameter Subindex of parameter P85 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameters P85 = x276f hex = 195 dec The value x287 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Parameter P85 must be set to 1 dec = x1 to activate the Expert mode. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. When the MLK31A double slave receives the service "Exchange request" x1d, it sends the MOVLNK protocol to the MOVMOT inverter. Once the MOVMOT inverter receives the MOVLNK response, the MLK31A double slave sends the response "Exchange response OK" to the AS-nterface master. Thus, another "Read request" service of the AS-nterface master is not required. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x32 x1 x27 x6f x x x x Code x5d = Management x32 = Subindex x1 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x6f = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request OK Write parameter Subindex of parameter P85 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameters P85 = x276f hex = 195 dec The value x276f hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data value is dec = x 148 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

149 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 Deactivating the mechanical control elements You have to deactivate the mechanical control elements as the parameterization of the MOVMOT inverter is to be carried out via the AS-nterface. To do so, write the value 255 dec = xff to parameter P12. "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x32 x1e x27 x7 x x xff xff Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x1e = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data xff Data LSB xff Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Write parameter Subindex of parameter P12 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter P12 = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Parameter P12 must be set to dec = xffff to deactivate the mechanical control elements. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. When the MLK31A double slave receives the service "Exchange request" x1d, it sends the MOVLNK protocol to the MOVMOT inverter. Once the MOVMOT inverter receives the MOVLNK response, the MLK31A double slave sends the response "Exchange response OK" to the AS-nterface master. Thus, another "Read request" service of the AS-nterface master is not required. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x32 x1e x27 x7 x x x x Code x5d = Management x32 = Subindex x1e = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request OK Write parameter Subindex of parameter P12 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter P12 = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data value is dec = x Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 149

150 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Setting ramp t11 up Set the ramp time of ramp t11 up (P13) to.5 s. "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x32 x x22 x67 x x x1 xf4 Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low x67 = Data MSB x Data x Data x1 Data LSB xf4 Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Write parameter Subindex of parameter P13 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P13 = x2267 hex = 887 dec The value x2267 hex is written on ndex High and ndex Low. Specify the ramp time of the MOVMOT inverter in ms in order to set the ramp time to.5 s = 5 ms (5 ms 5 dec = x1f4). This value is written to the 4 data bytes. When the MLK31A double slave receives the service "Exchange request" x1d, it sends the MOVLNK protocol to the MOVMOT inverter. Once the MOVMOT inverter receives the MOVLNK response, the MLK31A double slave sends the response "Exchange response OK" to the AS-nterface master. Thus, another "Read request" service of the AS-nterface master is not required. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x32 x x22 x67 x x x x Code x5d = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low x67 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request OK Write parameter Subindex of parameter P13 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter = x2267 hex = 887 dec The value x2267 hex is written on ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data value is dec = x Setting ramp t11 down Set the ramp time of ramp t11 down (P131) to.5 s. The ramp time for ramp t11 down (P131) is set in the same way as the ramp time for ramp t11 up (P13). Ramp t11 down (P131) has index 888 dec = x2268 and subindex. 15 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

151 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 Setting the fixed setpoint n Set fixed setpoint n (P17) to 1 rpm. "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x32 x x21 x29 x xf x42 x4 Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x21 = ndex Low x29 = Data MSB x Data xf Data x42 Data LSB x4 Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Write parameter Subindex of parameter P17 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter = x2129 hex = 8489 dec The value x2129 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. The internal scaling of the MOVMOT inverter is 1 times higher than the real scaling. The scaling factor then is 1 dec = xf424. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. When the MLK31A double slave receives the service "Exchange request" x1d, it sends the MOVLNK protocol to the MOVMOT inverter. Once the MOVMOT inverter receives the MOVLNK response, the MLK31A double slave sends the response "Exchange response OK" to the AS-nterface master. Thus, another "Read request" service of the AS-nterface master is not required. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x32 x x21 x29 x x x x Code x5d = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x21 = ndex Low x29 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request OK Write parameter Subindex of parameter P17 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P17 = x2129 hex = 8489 dec The value x2129 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data value is dec = x Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 151

152 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Reading out the heat sink temperature Read out the heat sink temperature from parameter P14 as follows: "Exchange request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Read length Write length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x1d x2 x8 x8 x31 x x2 x87 x x x x Code x1d = ndex x2 = Read length x8 = Write length x8 = Management x31 = Subindex x = ndex High x2 = ndex Low x87 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Exchange request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK response Length of the MOVLNK request Read parameter Subindex of parameter P14 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P14 = x287 hex = 8327 dec The value x287 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. When the MOVMOT parameters are read, the value x is written to the data. When the MLK31A double slave receives the service "Exchange request" x1d, it sends the MOVLNK protocol to the MOVMOT inverter. Once the MOVMOT inverter receives the MOVLNK response, the MLK31A double slave sends the response "Exchange response OK" to the AS-nterface master. Thus, another "Read request" service of the AS-nterface master is not required. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Exchange response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5d x31 x x2 x87 x x x x14 Code x5d = Management x31 = Subindex x = ndex High x2 = ndex Low x87 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x14 Exchange request OK Read parameter, no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P14 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex = x287 hex = 8893 dec The value x287 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. When the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data bytes transmit the heat sink temperature, e.g. 2 C x14. The unscaled heat sink temperature is stored in the MOVMOT inverter. The value x14 corresponds to a temperature of 2 C. 152 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

153 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Use of the "Read request" and "Write request" service (example) This example illustrates how to change individual parameters of the MOVMOT inverter with the CTT2 service "Write request" x11 and "Read request" x1. The following parameters of the MOVMOT inverter are to be changed: Ramp t11 up and t11 down to.5 s Fixed setpoint value n to 1 rpm Activation of the option to release the brake without drive enable signal (P738 = "ON") n addition, you want the heat sink temperature to be read. Checking the communication Read out the D object correctly in order to check the correct communication between the AS-nterface master and the MLK31A. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x x6 Code x1 = ndex x = Length X6 = Read request D object Length of the D object The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Vendor D High Vendor D Low Device D High Device D Low Output/input Firmware version x5 x xa x xa x x1 Code x5 = Read response OK Vendor D High x = High value of the vendor D Vendor D Low xa = Low value of the vendor D => Vendor D = xa hex = 1 dec. Device D High x = High value of the device D Device D Low xa = Low value of the device D => Device D = xa hex = 1 dec. Output/input x = No inputs and outputs Firmware version x1 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 153

154 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Activating the Expert mode in the MOVMOT inverter n order to be able to change parameters in the MOVMOT inverter, you have to activate the Expert mode once via parameter P85. "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x1 x27 x6f x x x x1 Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x1 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x6f = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x1 Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter P85 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameters P85 = x276f hex = 195 dec The value x276f hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Parameter P85 must be set to 1 dec = x1 to activate the Expert mode. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 154 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

155 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The response of the MOVLNK protocol is evaluated with the "Read request" service as follows in order to make sure that the MOVMOT inverter has changed parameter P85. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x1 x27 x6f x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x1 = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x6f = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P85 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameters P85 = x276f hex = 195 dec The value x276f hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 155

156 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Deactivating the mechanical control elements You have to deactivate the mechanical control elements as the parameterization of the MOVMOT inverter is to be carried out via the AS-nterface. To do so, write the value 255 dec = xff to parameter P12. "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x1e x27 x7 x x xff xff Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x1e = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data xff Data LSB xff Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter P12 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter P12 = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Parameter P12 must be set to dec = xffff to deactivate the mechanical control elements. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 156 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

157 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The response of the MOVLNK protocol is evaluated with the "Read request" service as follows in order to make sure that the MOVMOT inverter has changed parameter P12. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x1e x27 x7 x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x1e = ndex High x27 = ndex Low x7 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P12 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of the parameter P12 = x277 hex = 196 dec The value x277 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 157

158 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Setting ramp t11 up Set the ramp time of ramp t11 up (P13) to.5 s. "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x x22 x67 x x x1 xf4 Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low x67 = Data MSB x Data x Data x1 Data LSB xf4 Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter P13 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P13 = x2267 hex = 887 dec The value x2267 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Specify the ramp time of the MOVMOT inverter in ms in order to set the ramp time to.5 s = 5 ms (5 ms 5 dec = x1f4). This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 158 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

159 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The response of the MOVLNK protocol is evaluated with the "Read request" service as follows in order to make sure that the MOVMOT inverter has changed parameter P13. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x x22 x67 x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low x67 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P13 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P13 = x2267 hex = 887 dec The value x2267 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec Setting ramp t11 down Set the ramp time of ramp t11 down (P131) to.5 s. The ramp time for ramp t11 down (P131) is set in the same way as the ramp time for ramp t11 up (P13). Ramp t11 down (P131) has index 888 dec = x2268 and subindex. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 159

160 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Setting the fixed setpoint n Set fixed setpoint n (P17) to 1 rpm. "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x x21 x29 x xf x42 x4 Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x21 = ndex Low x29 = Data MSB x Data xf Data x42 Data LSB x4 Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter P17 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P17 = x2129 hex = 8489 dec The value x2129 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. The internal scaling of the MOVMOT inverter is 1 times higher than the real scaling. The scaling factor then is 1 dec = xf424. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 16 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

161 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The response of the MOVLNK protocol is evaluated with the "Read request" service as follows in order to make sure that the MOVMOT inverter has changed parameter P17. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x x21 x29 x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x21 = ndex Low x29 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P13 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P17 = x2129 hex = 8489 dec The value x2129 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 161

162 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Activation of the brake release without drive enable The brake of the drive can be controlled via the A slave of the MLK31A double slave. Before, you have to activate parameter P738 as follows. "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x32 x x22 xbd x x x x1 Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low xbd = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x1 Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Write parameter Subindex of parameter P738 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P738 = x22bd hex = 8893 dec The value x22bd hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. Parameter P738 must be set to 1 dec = x1 to activate the "Brake release without drive enable" function. This value is written to the 4 data bytes. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 162 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

163 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The response of the MOVLNK protocol is evaluated with the "Read request" service as follows in order to make sure that the MOVMOT inverter has changed parameter P738. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x32 x x22 xbd x x x x Code x5 = Management x32 = Subindex x = ndex High x22 = ndex Low xbd = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Read response OK Write parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P738 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P738 = x22bd hex = 8893 dec The value x22bd hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. f the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data byte value is x = dec Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 163

164 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface Reading out the heat sink temperature Read out the heat sink temperature from parameter P14 as follows: "Write request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x11 x2 x8 x31 x x2 x87 x x x x Code x11 = ndex x2 = Length x8 = Management x31 = Subindex x = ndex High x2 = ndex Low x87 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x Write request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol Read parameter Subindex of parameter P14 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P14 = x287 hex = 8327 dec The value x287 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. When the MOVMOT parameters are read, the value x is written to the data. The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Write response OK": CTT2 service Code x51 Code x51 = Write response OK Once the MLK31A double slave has correctly received the data, it immediately sends the response x51 "Write response OK" to the master. Simultaneously, the MOVLNK protocol is sent to the MOVMOT inverter. 164 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

165 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Transferring individual parameters via AS-nterface 9 The "Read request" service must be executed in order to receive the value of the parameter read-out by the MOVMOT inverter. "Read request" service: CTT2 service Code ndex Length x1 x2 x8 Code x1 = ndex x2 = Length X8 = Read request MOVLNK parameter service Length of the MOVLNK protocol The slave replies after the system-related telegram runtime. Response telegram "Read response OK": CTT2 service Code Ma nagement Subindex ndex high MOVLNK protocol ndex low MSB data Data Data LSB data x5 x31 x x2 x87 x x x x14 Code x5 = Management x31 = Subindex x = ndex High x2 = ndex Low x87 = Data MSB x Data x Data x Data LSB x14 Read response OK Read parameter => no MOVLNK error Subindex of parameter P14 High value of the index Low value of the index => ndex of parameter P14 = x287 hex = 8893 dec The value x287 hex is written on bytes ndex High and ndex Low. When the MOVLNK service has been executed correctly, the data bytes transmit the heat sink temperature, e.g. 2 C x14. The unscaled heat sink temperature is stored in the MOVMOT inverter. The value x14 corresponds to a temperature of 2 C. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 165

166 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list 9.12 Parameter list No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling Display values _ Process values 8318 Speed (signed) [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm Frequency (signed) [Hz] 1 digit =.1 Hz Output current (value) [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N Active current (signed) [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N Motor utilization [%] 1 digit =.1% DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V Output current [A] 1 digit =.1 A 1_ Status displays nverter status [Text] Operating state [Text] Error status [Text] Startup mode [Text] Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h DP switch setting S1, S2 [Bit field] Setting switch f2,1,2, Setting switch t1,1,2, 1 2_ Analog setpoints Setting setpoint potentiometer f1 1 1 digit =.1 5_ Binary outputs Bit 1 Setting output X1 [Bit field] 7_ Unit data Unit type [Text] Rated output current [A] 1 digit =.1 A DM slot option [Text] DM data set Part number DM data set DM data set version DM data set version AS-interface option : Not installed 1: MLK3A 2: MLK31A AS-nterface firmware Firmware part number of the AS-nterface AS-nterface firmware version Firmware version of the AS-nterface Basic unit firmware Part number and version of the basic unit Deactivating mechanical control elements [Bit field] (display value) Operating mode [Text] - 1 Motor type [Text] Nominal voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V Rated frequency [Hz] 1 digit =.1 Hz Nominal speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm Rated power [kw] 1 digit =.1 kw Brake type [Text] 166 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

167 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list 9 No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling 8_ Error memory 8 Error t- Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 934 Error subcode 8883 nternal error 8381 X1 [Bit field] 8391 nverter status [Text] 8396 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 841 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 846 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8411 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8416 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8421 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8426 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8431 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 81 Error t-1 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 935 Error subcode 8884 nternal error 8382 X1 [Bit field] 8392 nverter status [Text] 8397 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 842 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 847 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8412 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8417 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8422 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8427 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8432 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 82 Error t-2 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 936 Error subcode 8885 nternal error 8383 X1 [Bit field] 8393 nverter status [Text] 8398 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 843 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 848 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8413 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8418 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8423 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8428 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8433 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 167

168 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name 83 Error t-3 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 937 Error subcode 8886 nternal error 8384 X1 [Bit field] 8394 nverter status [Text] 8399 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 844 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 849 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8414 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8419 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8424 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 8429 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8434 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 84 Error t-4 Background information for errors that occurred in the past when t Error code 938 Error subcode 8887 nternal error 8385 X1 [Bit field] 8395 nverter status [Text] 84 Heat sink temperature [ C] 1 digit = 1 C 845 Speed [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm 841 Output current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8415 Active current [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 842 Unit utilization [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N 8425 DC link voltage [V] 1 digit =.1 V 843 Operating hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 8435 Enable hours [h] 1 Digit = 1 min = 1/6 h 9_ Bus diagnostics 94/97 AS-nterface monitor 8455 AS-nterface output bit DO [Bit field bit 9] AS-nterface output bit DO1 [Bit field bit 1] AS-nterface output bit DO2 [Bit field bit 11] AS-nterface output bit DO3 [Bit field bit 6] AS-nterface output bit P1 [Bit field bit 12] AS-nterface output bit P2 [Bit field bit 13] AS-nterface output bit P3 [Bit field bit 14] AS-nterface output bit P4 Reserved AS-nterface output bit D2 [Bit field bit 2] AS-nterface input bit D3 [Bit field bit 3] 8458 AS-nterface input bit D [Bit field bit ] AS-nterface input bit D1 [Bit field bit 1] MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling depending on the selected function module 168 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

169 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list 9 No. 1 ndex dec. Subindex dec. Setpoints/ramp generators Name 1_ Setpoint selection Deactivating mechanical control elements MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) [Bit field] Default: MOVLNK scaling 13_ Speed ramps Ramp t11 up [s] 1 digit =.1 s (Switch t1) 1) Ramp t11 down [s] 1 digit =.1 s (Switch t1) 1) Ramp t12 up = down [s] 1 digit =.1 s S pattern t12 : OFF 1: Level 1 2: Level 2 3: Level Stop ramp t [s] 1 digit =.1 s Ramp t15 up [s] 1 digit =.1 s Ramp t15 down [s] 1 digit =.1 s Ramp t16 up [s] 1 digit =.1 s Ramp t16 down [s] 1 digit =.1 s 16_ Setpoints Setpoint n_f rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Setpoint n_f rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm 17_ Fixed setpoints Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Fixed setpoint n rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm 3 Motor parameters 3_ Limits Start/stop speed rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Minimum speed 6 36 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Maximum speed 3 36 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Current limit 16 [% N ] 1 digit =.1% N Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 169

170 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name 32_ Motor adjustment Automatic adjustment : OFF 1: ON Boost 1 [%] 1 digit =.1% xr adjustment 1 [%] 1 digit =.1% Premagnetization 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Slip compensation 5 [rpm] 1 digit =.1 rpm No-load vibration damping : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S1/8) 1) 34_ Motor protection Motor protection : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S1/5) 1) Type of cooling : Fan cooled 1: Forced cooling Motor cable length 15 [m] 1 digit = 1 m 5 Monitoring functions 5_ Speed monitoring Speed monitoring : OFF 3: Motor/regenerative (DP switch S2/4) 1) Delay time [s] 1 digit =.1 s 52_ Mains OFF monitoring Mains phase failure monitoring Deactivating the mains phase failure check in unfavorable operating conditions can damage the unit. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) : OFF 1: ON MOVLNK scaling Mains off monitoring : Operation on three-phase mains supply 1: Operation with MOVTRANS 7 Control functions 7_ Operating modes Operating mode : VFC 2: VFC hoist 3: VFC DC braking 21: V/f characteristic curve 22: V/f + DC braking (DP switch S2/3) 1) 71_ Standstill current Standstill current 5% Mot 1 digit =.1 % Mot 72_ Setpoint stop function Setpoint stop function : OFF 1: ON Stop setpoint 3 5 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm Start offset 3 5 rpm 1 digit =.1 rpm 17 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

171 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter list 9 No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name 73_ Brake function Brake release time 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Brake application time.2 2 [s] 1 digit =.1 s Activation of brake release without drive enable : OFF 1: ON (DP switch S2/2) 1) 77_ Energy-saving function Energy-saving function : OFF 1: ON 8 Unit functions 8_ Setup Factory setting : No factory setting 2: Delivery state Parameter lock : OFF 1: ON Startup mode : Easy 1: Expert 81_ Serial communication RS-485 timeout interval [s] (only display) 1 digit =.1 s 83_ Error responses Motor overload error response : No response 1: Display error 2: mmediate stop / locking 4: Rapid stop / locking 12: Normal stop / locking 84_ Reset behavior Manual reset : No 1: Yes 86_ Modulation PWM frequency : 4 khz 1: 8 khz 3: 16 khz (DP switch S1/7) 1) 1) The parameter value depends on the setting of the controls. MOVTOOLS MotionStudio display (Range / factory setting) MOVLNK scaling Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 171

172 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9.13 Parameter description Display values Parameter Speed (signed) The displayed speed is the calculated actual speed. Parameter 2 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 1 Frequency (signed) Output frequency of the inverter Output current (amount) Apparent current in range...2% of the rated unit current Active current (signed) Active current in range -2%...+2% of the rated unit current The sign of the active current depends on the direction of rotation and the type of load: Direction of Load Speed Active current rotation CW rotation Motor Positive (n > ) Positive ( W > ) CCW rotation Motor Negative (n < ) Negative ( W < ) CW rotation Regenerative Positive (n > ) Negative ( W < ) CCW rotation Regenerative Negative (n < ) Positive ( W > ) Motor utilization Motor utilization in [%], calculated using a motor temperature model DC link voltage Voltage in [V] measure in the DC link Output current Apparent current in [A] nverter status nverter statuses NHBTED ENABLED 172 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

173 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 16 Operating state The following operating states are possible: 24 V OPERATON CONTROLLER NHBT NO ENABLE STANDSTLL CURRENT ENABLE FACTORY SETTNG ERROR TMEOUT Error status Error status in text form Startup mode Startup mode in text form Heat sink temperature Heat sink temperature of the inverter Operating hours The total of hours in which the inverter was connected to the external DC 24 V supply Storage cycle: 15 min Enable hours Sum of hours in which the output stage of the inverter was enabled Storage cycle: 15 min Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 173

174 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Parameter 17 DP switch setting S1/ S2 Display of DP switch settings for S1 and S2: DP switch Bit in index Functionality S1/1 Bit Unit address Unit address bit 2 S1/2 Bit 1 Unit address bit 2 1 S1/3 Bit 2 Unit address bit 2 2 S1/4 Bit 3 Unit address bit 2 3 S1/5 Bit 11 Motor protection : Motor protection ON 1: Motor protection OFF S1/6 Bit 9 ncreased short-time torque : Motor adjusted 1: Motor power rating one stage smaller S1/7 Bit 12 PWM cycle frequency : 4 khz 1: Variable (16, 8, 4 khz) S1/8 Bit 13 No-load damping : Off 1: On S2/1 Bit 7 Brake type : Standard brake 1: Optional brake S2/2 Bit 15 Brake release without drive enable : Off 1: On S2/3 Bit 6 Control mode : VFC control 1: V/f control S2/4 Bit 16 Speed monitoring : Off 1: On S2/5 Bit 17 Additional function Additional function setting bit 2 S2/6 Bit 18 Additional function setting bit 2 1 S2/7 Bit 19 Additional function setting bit 2 2 S2/8 Bit 2 Additional function setting bit 2 3 The display of the DP switch setting is independent of whether the DP switch function is activated or deactivated. 174 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

175 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9 Parameter 18 Parameter 19 Parameter 2 Parameter 51 Parameter 7 Parameter 71 Parameter 72 Setting switch f2 Displays the setting of switch f2 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the switch function is activated or deactivated. Setting switch t1 Displays the setting of switch t1 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the switch function is activated or deactivated. Setting setpoint potentiometer f1 Displays the setting of setpoint potentiometer f1 The display of the switch setting is independent of whether the potentiometer function is activated or deactivated. Setting output X1 Displays the status of the output for controlling the BEM option Unit type The unit type is displayed Rated output current The rated unit current is displayed in [A] DM slot option Displays the Drive D module type which is used in the Drive D module slot X3 Parameter value Type of the Drive D module No Drive-D module 1 9 Reserved 1 DT/DV/4/5 11 DZ/38/6 12 DRS/4/5 13 DRE4/5 14 DRS/46/6 15 DRE/46/6 16 DRS/DRE/38/6 (ABNT) 17 DRS/DRE/5/6 (DR global) 18 Reserved 19 DRP/4/5 2 DRP/46/ Reserved Display of the part number and the data set version on the DM module Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 175

176 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Parameter 73 Type of AS-nterface option Display of the type of the AS-nterface option Parameter value Type of AS-nterface option AS-nterface option is not available 1 MLK3A binary slave 2 MLK31A double slave Parameter index Firmware part number of the AS-nterface option Display of the firmware part number of the AS-nterface option Parameter index Firmware version of the AS-nterface option Display of the firmware version of the AS-nterface option Parameter 76 Firmware basic unit Displays the part number and version of the unit firmware Parameter 7 Operating mode The selected operating mode is displayed Parameter index 1. Motor type Display of the installed motor type (according to nameplate). Parameter index Nominal voltage Display of the nominal voltage of the drive in [V] (according to nameplate). Parameter index 864. Rated frequency Display of the nominal frequency of the drive in [Hz] (according to nameplate). Parameter index Nominal speed Display of the nominal speed of the drive in [rpm] (according to nameplate). Parameter index 116. Rated power Display of the nominal power of the drive in [kw] (according to nameplate). Parameter index Brake type Display of the installed brake type (according to nameplate). Parameter 8 84 Error code and diagnostics data The unit saves the diagnostic data in the event of an error. The last five errors are displayed in the error memory. Parameter 94/ 97 AS-nterface monitor The parameters P94 and P97 are used as bus monitor of the AS-nterface and display the transmission of AS-nterface bits from and to the MOVMOT inverter. The meaning of the AS-nterface data bits depends on the selected function module (see section "Function modules"). 176 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

177 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Setpoints/ramp generators Parameter 12 Deactivating mechanical controls Use this bit-coded selection box to deactivate the mechanical controls of the MOVMOT inverter. The value of the parameter set at the factory enables all mechanical controls. Bit Meaning Note 4 Reserved 5 Deactivating the DP switch S1/5 (motor protection) Bit not set: Bit set: 6 Reserved 7 Deactivating the DP switch S1/7 (PWM cycle frequency) 8 Deactivating the DP switch S1/8 (no-load damping) 9 Reserved 1 Deactivating the DP switch S2/2 (releasing the brake) 11 Deactivating the DP switch S2/3 (operating mode) 12 Deactivating the DP switch S2/4 (Speed monitoring) 13 Deactivating the setpoint potentiometer f1 Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: Bit not set: Bit set: 14 Deactivating switch f2 Bit not set: Switch f2 active Bit set: 15 Deactivating switch t1 Bit not set: Switch t1 active Bit set: DP switch S1/5 active DP switch S1/5 not active: Switching the motor protection function on / off using parameters DP switch S1/7 active DP switch S1/7 not active Setting the PWM cycle frequency using parameters DP switch S1/8 active DP switch S1/8 not active Activation / deactivation of no-load damping using parameters DP switch S2/2 active DP switch S2/2 not active Activation / deactivation of brake release without drive enable using parameters DP switch S2/3 active DP switch S2/3 not active Selecting the operating mode using parameters DP switch S2/4 active DP switch S2/4 not active Activation / deactivation of speed monitoring using parameters Setpoint potentiometer f1 active Setpoint potentiometer f1 not active Setting the setpoint and the maximum speed using parameters Switch f2 not active Setting the setpoint and the minimum speed using parameters Switch t1 not active Setting the ramp times using parameters Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 177

178 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Parameter 13 Ramp t11 up Acceleration ramp for function modules 1, 5, 7 of the double slave The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Parameter 131 Ramp t11 down Deceleration ramp for function modules 1, 5, 7 of the double slave The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Parameter 134 Ramp t12 up = down Acceleration and deceleration ramp at S pattern The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). The ramp time sets the acceleration and deceleration if parameter P135 S pattern t12 has been set to grade 1, grade 2 or grade 3. NFORMATON t is not possible to determine a setpoint via process data when parameter P135 S pattern t12 is activated. Parameter 135 S pattern t12 This parameter determines the pattern grade (1 = low, 2 = medium, 3 = high) of the ramp. The S pattern is used for rounding off the ramp and allows for a soft acceleration of the drive in the event of a setpoint change. The following figure shows the effect of the S pattern: n [1] [2] [3] [1] Setpoint selection [2] Speed without S pattern [3] Speed with S pattern NFORMATON t Once started, an S pattern phase can be interrupted with stop ramp t13. f the setpoint is reduced or the enable signal is revoked, the started S pattern phase is completed. Thus the drive can accelerate until the end of the S pattern phase despite the setpoint reduction. 178 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

179 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9 Parameter 136 Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter 16 Parameter 161 Parameter 17_ Stop ramp t13 The stop ramp time is effective for a stop along the stop ramp. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Ramp t15 up Acceleration ramp, depending on active function module. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Ramp t15 down Deceleration ramp, depending on active function module. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Ramp t16 up Acceleration ramp, depending on active function module. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Ramp t16 down Deceleration ramp, depending on active function module. The ramp times are based on a setpoint step change of 15 rpm (5 Hz). Setpoint n_f1 The setpoint n_f1 is valid if the setpoint potentiometer f1 is deactivated, i.e. when parameter P12:13 = "1" and the function module 7 hex is active. Setpoint n_f2 The setpoint n_f2 is valid if the switch f2 is deactivated, i.e. when parameter P12:14 = "1" and the function module 7 hex is active. Fixed setpoint n n5 Fixed setpoints n n5, depending on active function module. The sign of the fixed setpoint and the function selected at outputs DO DO3 determine the direction of rotation of the motor. Sign of the fixed setpoint (n n5) selected function (DO DO3) Direction of rotation Drive Positive (n > ) Clockwise rotation Clockwise rotation Positive (n > ) Counterclockwise rotation Counterclockwise rotation Negative (n < ) Clockwise rotation Counterclockwise rotation Negative (n < ) Counterclockwise rotation Clockwise rotation Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 179

180 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Motor parameters Parameter 3 Start/stop speed This parameter defines the smallest speed request which the inverter sends to the motor when enabled. The transition to the speed determined in the setpoint selection is made using the active acceleration ramp. When the enable signal is removed, the parameter determines the frequency as of which the MOVMOT inverter detects the motor standstill and starts to engage the brake. Parameter 31 Parameter 32 Parameter 33 Parameter 32 Parameter 321 Parameter 322 Parameter 323 Minimal speed (when switch f2 is deactivated) This parameter defines the minimum speed n min of the drive. The drive does not fall below this speed value even when the setpoint specification is slower than the minimum speed. Maximum speed (when switch f1 is deactivated) This parameter defines the maximum speed n max of the drive. The drive does not exceed this speed value even when the setpoint specification is higher than the maximum speed. f you set n min > n max, then the value set in n min applies to the minimum speed and the maximum speed. Current limit The internal current limitation is based on the apparent output current. The inverter automatically decreases the current limit internally in the field weakening range to implement stall protection for the connected motor. Automatic adjustment When the parameter is activated, the motor is calibrated each time the operating status changes to ENABLE. Boost f parameter P32 Automatic adjustment = "On", the inverter sets parameter P321 BOOST automatically. This parameter does not usually have to be set manually. n exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. xr adjustment f parameter P32 Automatic adjustment = "On", the inverter sets parameter P322 xr adjustment automatically. Only specialists are permitted to change this parameter -manually to optimize the settings. Premagnetization The pre-magnetization time allows for a magnetic field is built up in the motor when the inverter is enabled. 18 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

181 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9 Parameter 324 Parameter 325 Parameter 34 Parameter 341 Parameter 347 Slip compensation Slip compensation increases the speed accuracy of the motor. Enter the rated slip of the connected motor as a manual entry. The slip compensation is designed for a ratio smaller than 1 for load moment of inertia to motor moment of inertia. f control starts oscillating, you must reduce the slip compensation or set it to, if required. No-load vibration damping (when DP switch S1/8 is deactivated) No-load vibration damping can be activated when the motor tends to be unstable under no-load conditions. Motor protection (when DP switch S1/5 is deactivated) Activation / deactivation of the thermal protection model for MOVMOT When this function is activated, MOVMOT takes over the thermal protection of the drive by electronic means. Type of cooling This parameter is used for defining the cooling type (fan cooled or forced cooling) that is the basis for calculating the motor temperature. Motor cable length This parameter is used for defining the motor cable length (= cable length of the SEW hybrid cable between MOVMOT inverter and motor) that is the basis for calculating the motor temperature. This parameter must only be changed if the unit is installed close to the motor. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 181

182 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Control functions Parameter 5 Speed monitoring (when DP switch S2/4 is deactivated) With MOVMOT, speed monitoring is performed by evaluating operation at the current limit. Speed monitoring is triggered when the current limit is maintained for the duration of the set deceleration time (parameter P51). Parameter 51 Parameter 522 Delay time The set current limit can be reached during acceleration, deceleration, or load peaks. The delay time prevents speed monitoring from responding too sensitively. The current limit must be maintained for the duration of the set delay time before monitoring responds. Mains phase failure check Deactivate this monitoring function to prevent the mains phase failure check from triggering with unsymmetrical supply systems. NOTCE Deactivating the mains phase failure check in unfavorable operating conditions can damage the unit. Parameter 523 Mains off monitoring Use this parameter to adjust the mains off monitoring function of the inverter for operation with MOVTRANS. 182 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

183 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Control functions Parameter 7 Operating mode (when DP switch S2/3 is deactivated) This parameter is used to set the basic operating mode of the inverter. VFC / V/f characteristic curve: Default setting for asynchronous motors. This setting is suitable for general applications such as conveyor belts, trolleys, etc. VFC hoist: The hoisting function automatically provides all functions necessary for operating a simple hoist application. For the hoist function to be performed correctly, the motor brake must be controlled using the inverter. The VFC hoist operating mode affects the following parameters: No. ndex dec. Subindex dec. Name Value P Start/stop speed = 6 rpm f the start/stop speed is set to less than 6 rpm. P Minimum speed = 6 rpm f the minimum speed is set to less than 6 rpm P Current limit = Rated motor current f the current limit is set to a lower value than the rated motor current P Premagnetization = 2 ms f pre-magnetization is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Speed monitoring = 3: Motor/regenerative P Brake release time = 2 ms f the brake release time is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Brake application time = 2 ms f the brake application time is set to a lower value than 2 ms P Activation of brake release without drive enable = : OFF n VFC hoist operating mode, the MOVMOT inverter checks whether the values of these parameters are permitted. The speed monitoring function cannot be deactivated in VFC hoist operating mode. The function "Brake release without drive enable" cannot be activated in VFC hoist operating mode. VFC DC braking / V/f DC braking: This setting means the asynchronous motor brakes by using current injection. The motor brakes without braking resistor on the inverter. DANGER With DC braking, guided stops are not possible and certain ramp values cannot be observed. Severe or fatal injuries. Use a different operating mode. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 183

184 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Parameter 71 Standstill current When the standstill current function is activated, the inverter injects a current in the motor at standstill. The standstill current fulfills the following functions: When the ambient temperature of the motor is low, the standstill current prevents the risk of condensation and freezing of the brake. Set the current level in such a way that the motor will not overheat. f you have activated the standstill current, you can enable the motor without premagnetization. When the standstill function is activated, the output stage remains enabled even in the "NO ENABLE" status to inject the motor standstill current. n the event of an error, the motor might no longer be energized depending on the error response. DANGER A communication timeout does not interrupt the standstill current. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT from the mains using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least one minute before opening the wiring space of MOVMOT or the connected drive, or touching the plug connector contacts. 184 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

185 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description 9 Parameters Setpoint stop function Stop setpoint Start offset f the setpoint stop function is activated, the inverter is enabled when the speed setpoint is larger than the stop setpoint + start offset. nverter enable is revoked when the speed setpoint falls below the stop setpoint. ntegrator setpoint Stop setpoint Start offset Start setpoint Speed setpoint Parameter 731 Parameter 732 Parameter 738 Parameter 77 Brake release time This parameter is used for defining how long the motor is to run at minimum speed after pre-magnetization ends. This time is necessary for opening the brake completely. Brake release reaction time You can use this parameter to set the time required for the mechanical brake to apply. Activation of brake release without drive enable (when DP switch S2/2 is deactivated) f this parameter is set to the value "ON", the brake can be released even if the drive is not enabled, see section "Data AS-nterface master -> MOVMOT " (page 79). This functionality is only available when the motor brake is controlled via the inverter. The brake is always applied when the unit is not ready for operation. The brake cannot be released when the drive is not enabled in conjunction with the hoisting function. Energy-efficiency function f this parameter is set to "OFF", the inverter reduces the no-load current Unit functions Parameter 82 Factory setting Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 185

186 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description f you set this parameter to "Delivery state", all parameters that have a factory setting and can not be set using DP switches S1/S2 or switches t1/f2 are reset to their factory setting value. For parameters that can be set at DP switches S1/S2 or at switches t1/f1, the setting of the mechanical setting element becomes active when the factory setting "Delivery state" is selected during "Easy" startup. Parameter 83 Parameter lock f this parameter is set to "ON", you cannot change any of the parameters except the parameter lock. This setting makes sense once you have finished starting up the unit and optimizing the parameters. You can only change the parameters again when this parameter is set to "OFF". Parameter 85 Startup mode Parameterization of the startup mode "Easy" When selecting "Easy" mode, DP switches S1, S2 and switches f2, t1 are used for starting up MOVMOT quickly and easily. "Expert" "Expert" mode includes additional parameters. Parameter 812 RS-485 timeout interval Display of the timeout monitoring time of the RS-485 interface. Parameter 832 Motor overload error response Use this parameter to determine the error response that is performed in the event of a motor overload (error code 84). Parameter 84 Manual reset f an error is present at the MOVMOT inverter, you can acknowledge the error by setting this parameter to "ON". Once the error has been reset, the parameter is set automatically to "OFF" again. f the power section does not indicate an error, setting the parameter to "ON" has no effect. Parameter 86 PWM frequency (when DP switch S1/7 is deactivated) You can use this parameter to set the nominal cycle frequency at the inverter output. The cycle frequency can change automatically depending on the unit utilization. 186 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

187 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Parameters that depend on mechanical controls The following mechanical controls influence the user parameters: DP switch S1 DP switch S2 Setpoint potentiometer f1 Switch f2 Switch t1 Mechanical control DP switch S1/5 DP switch S1/7 DP switch S1/8 DP switch S2/2 DP switch S2/3 DP switch S2/4 Setpoint potentiometer f1 Switch f2 nfluenced Parameters P34 Motor protection P86 PWM frequency P325 No-load vibration damping P738 Brake release without drive enable P7 Operating mode P5 Speed monitoring P32 Maximum speed P31 Minimum speed Effect of parameter P12 Bit 5 Bit not set: Activating / deactivating the motor protection function at DP switch S1/5 Bit not set: Activating / deactivating the motor protection function using parameters 7 Bit not set: Selecting the PWM frequency at DP switch S1/7 Bit set: Selecting the PWM frequency using parameters 8 Bit not set: Activating / deactivating the no-load vibration damping function at DP switch S1/8 Bit set: Activation / deactivation of no-load vibration damping using parameters 1 Bit not set: Activating / deactivating the function "Brake release without drive enable" at DP switch S2/2 Bit set: Activation / deactivation of the function "Brake release without drive enable" using parameters 11 Bit not set: Selecting the operating mode at DP switch S2/3 Bit set: Selecting the operating mode using parameters 12 Bit not set: Activating / deactivating the speed monitoring function at DP switch S2/4 Bit set: Activation / deactivation of speed monitoring using parameters 13 Bit not set: Setting the maximum speed at setpoint potentiometer f1 Bit set: Setting the maximum speed using parameters 14 Bit not set: Setting the minimum speed at switch f2 Bit set: Setting the minimum speed using parameters Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 187

188 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Parameter description Mechanical control Switch t1 nfluenced Parameters P13 Acceleration ramp P131 Deceleration ramp Effect of parameter P12 Bit 15 Bit not set: Setting the ramps at switch t1 Bit set: Setting the ramps using parameters 188 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

189 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor When the MOVMOT inverter with is installed close to the motor, observe the notes in the following sections: Checking the connection type of the connected motor Use the following figure to check that the selected connection type is identical for the MOVMOT and the connected motor. W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W mportant: For brakemotors: Do not install brake rectifiers inside the terminal box of the motor! Motor protection t is not possible to connect the TH (bimetallic thermostat). When the MOVMOT inverter is mounted close to the motor in conjunction with the MLK31A AS-nterface option, the motor protection must be activated at the DP switch S1/5 as follows: ON n order to ensure the motor protection, you have to set the motor cable length according to the length of the installed hybrid cable via parameter P347. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 189

190 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 X1: 13 X1: 14 X1: 15 9 MOVMOT Startup with Double Slave Supplementary notes for installation close to the motor Braking resistor For motors without brake, a braking resistor must be connected to the MOVMOT. BW1 / BW For brakemotors without BEM option, no braking resistor may be connected to the MOVMOT. For brakemotors with BEM option and external braking resistor, the external braking resistor and the brake must be connected as follows: X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 L1 L2 BW ~ ~ + _ UN BEM U E RD BU BK BK RD WH BU BE/BR M 3~ Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

191 Operation Operating display 1 1 Operation 1.1 Operating display The following figure shows the position of the status and AS-nterface LED on the MOVMOT drive: [1] [2] [1] MOVMOT status LED [2] AS-nterface LED Meaning of the status LED states The AS-nterface LED signalizes the status of the AS-nterface slaves. MLK3A LED LED status Operating state Description color Off Not ready No 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface Green lluminated Ready Normal operation 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface OK Communication present Red lluminated Not ready Communication interrupted or slave address = Red/ green Flashes regularly Not ready Communication or peripheral error MLK31A LED LED status Operating state Description color Off Not ready No 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface Green lluminated Ready Normal operation 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface OK Communication present Red lluminated Not ready Communication error at A or B slave Red Flashes regularly Not ready Protocol error, no CTT3 communication with A slave or no CTT2 communication with B slave Yellow/ red Flashes regularly Not ready Slave address = Red/ green Flashes regularly Not ready Peripheral error at A or B slave. There is no communication between MLK31A and the MOVMOT inverter. 191

192 1 Operation Operating display Meaning of the status LED states The three-color status LED indicates the operating and error statuses of the MOVMOT inverter. LED LED status Operating state Description color Off Not ready No AS-nterface supply at the AS-nterface connection Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Green /yellow Flashes steadily Not ready Self-test phase active or AS-nterface supply present but supply voltage not OK Flashes evenly, fast Ready Brake release without drive enable active (only with S2/2 = "ON") Steady light 2x flashing, break Flashes with alternating colors Ready, but unit inhibited Ready, but manual operation without unit enable Ready, but timeout AS-nterface supply and supply voltage OK, but no enable signal f drive does not run when enable signal is present - check startup. 24 V power supply and supply voltage OK Stop manual mode to activate automatic mode Faulty communication with cyclical data exchange Green Steady light Unit enabled Motor in operation Green Flashes evenly, fast Current limit active Drive operating at current limit Green Flashes steadily Ready Standstill current function active Red Steady light Not ready Check the 24 V supply. Make sure that there is a smoothed DC voltage with low ripple (residual ripple max. 13%) present. Status LED flash codes Flashing steadily: Flashing evenly, fast: Flashing with alternating colors: LED 6 ms on, 6 ms off LED 1 ms on, 3 ms off LED 6 ms green, 6 ms yellow For a description of the error statuses, refer to section "Meaning of the status LED" (page 211). 192 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

193 Operation Drive D module Drive D module The pluggable Drive D module is installed in the basic unit. The following figure shows the Drive D module and its position in the MOVMOT inverter. [1] [1] [1] Drive-D module The Drive D module receives a memory module on which the following information is stored: Motor data Brake data User parameters f a MOVMOT inverter has to be replaced, you can re-startup the system by simply replugging the Drive D module without a PC or data backup. NOTCE f, during a unit replacement the DP switch setting is not transmitted correctly, or a MOVMOT inverter with a different part number is used (e.g. with a different power level), The MOVMOT inverter detects a change in configuration. This may reinitialize certain startup parameters. This is why the MOVMOT inverter must only be replaced with a MOVMOT inverter with the same part number. For information regarding unit replacements, refer to section "Unit replacement" (page 216). 193

194 1 Operation MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 1.3 MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio MOVMOT drives are equipped with an X5 diagnostics interface for startup and service. t can be used for diagnostics, manual operation and parameter setting. For manual operation of the MOVMOT drive, you can use the manual operation function of the MOVTOOLS MotionStudio software. 1. Connect the PC to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5). 2. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. See section "MOVTOOLS MotionStudio" (page 84). 3. Once the MOVMOT inverter is successfully integrated, open the context menu by clicking on the right mouse button and select the menu item "Startup" / "Manual operation". The "Manual operation" window opens Activating / deactivating manual operation Manual operation can only be activated if the MOVMOT drive is inhibited. t can not be activated if the brake is released without drive enable or if the inverter output stage is enabled to supply a standstill current. 194 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

195 Operation MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 1 [1] To activate manual operation, click on the button [Activate manual operation] [1] The AS-nterface bit D1 sends a signal to the higher-level controller, indicating that manual mode has been activated (with MLK31A see also section "Function modules"). Manual operation remains active even after an error reset or after the 24 V supply has been switched off. Manual operation is deactivated When you click on the button [Deactivate manual operation] Or when you close the "Manual operation" window Or set parameter P82 Factory setting to "Delivery state". NFORMATON When you deactivate the manual operation, the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 take effect. DANGER Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally. Severe or fatal injuries. Prior to deactivating the manual mode, set the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 to "" to revoke the enable signal. Take additional safety precautions depending on the application to avoid injury to people and damage to machinery. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 195

196 1 Operation MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Control in manual mode Once manual operation has been successfully activated, you can control the MOVMOT drive using the controls in the "Manual operation" window of MOVTOOLS MotionStudio. [9] [1] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Set the variable setpoint speed with the slide control [2] in the "Control" group. 2. Use the buttons [CW] [6] or [CCW] [5] to determine the direction of rotation. 3. Click on the [Start] button [3] to enable the MOVMOT drive. The motor axis [4] displayed in the "Control" group symbolizes the direction of rotation and the speed of the motor. 4. Use the [Stop] button [8] to stop the drive. As an alternative, you can enter the setpoints for rapid and creep speed or the variable speed setpoint directly in the "Setpoints" group [1]. The direction of rotation is determined by the sign (positive = CW operation, negative = CCW operation). First enter the setpoint, then press <ENTER> and click on the button that contains the setpoint input field in order to enable the MOVMOT drive. The group "Actual values" [9] displays the following actual values of the MOVMOT drive: Status of the MOVMOT inverter Motor speed in [rpm] Output current of the MOVMOT inverter in [%] of N 196 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

197 Operation MOVMOT manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 1 On MOVMOT drives with a brake, you can release the brake even without drive enable by activating the "Brake release" checkbox. NFORMATON The brake can only be released without drive enable if DP switch S2/2 = "ON" or this function is enabled via parameter P Reset in manual operation mode f an error occurs at the MOVMOT inverter, you can reset the error by clicking on the [Reset] button [1] Timeout monitoring in manual operation mode Timeout monitoring is active during manual operation to prevent uncontrolled operation of the MOVMOT drive in case of communication problems. The timeout interval can be specified in the "Timeout" input field [7]. f communication between MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and the MOVMOT inverter is interrupted longer than this timeout interval, the enable for the MOVMOT drive is revoked and the brake is applied. Manual operation remains active. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 197

198 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1.4 DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Description Function You can use the DBG keypad for parameterization and manual operation of MOVMOT drives. n addition to that, the keypad displays important information about the state of the MOVMOT drive. Features lluminated plain text display, up to 7 languages can be set Keypad with 21 keys Can be connected via extension cable DKG6B (5 m) Overview Keypad Language Part number DBG6B-1 DBG6B-2 DBG6B-3 DBG6B-4 DE / EN / FR / T / ES / PT / NL (German / English / French / talian / Spanish / Portuguese / Dutch) DE / EN / FR / F / SV / DA / TR (German / English / French / Finnish / Swedish / Danish / Turkish) DE / EN / FR / RU / PL / CS (German / English / French / Russian / Polish / Czech) DE/EN/FR/CN (German / English / French / Chinese) NFORMATON For notes on connecting the DBG keypad, refer to section "Connection of the DBG keypad" (page 49). STOP The degree of protection specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plug of the diagnostic interface is mounted correctly. A missing or incorrectly installed screw plug can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. Screw the screw plug back on with the seal after performing parameter setting, diagnostics or manual operation. 198 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

199 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 Key assignment The following figure shows the key assignment of the DBG keypad: [1] [2] [3] [4] [7] [8] [9] [1] [11] [5] [6] [12] [1] Key Stop [2] Key Delete previous entry [3] Key Select language [4] Key Change menu [5] Key <>-<9> Digits -9 [6] Key +/- Sign reversal [7] Key Up arrow, moves up to the next menu item [8] Key Start [9] Key OK, confirms the entry [1] Key Activate the context menu [11] Key Down arrow, moves down to the next menu item [12] Key Decimal point Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 199

200 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Operation Selecting a language 1. The following text appears on the display for a few sections when the DBG keypad is switched on for the first time or after activating the delivery status: SEW EURODRVE The symbol for language selection then appears on the display Press the key until the desired language appears. Press the key to confirm your selection. The DBG keypad searches for the connected units and displays them in the unit selection list DEUTSCH ENGLSCH FRANZÖSSCH Context menu You can use the key to go to the context menu. For the MOVMOT MM..D inverter with AS-nterface, the following menu items are available in the context menu of the DBG keypad: "BASC VEW" "PARAMETER MODE" "MANUAL MODE" "SCALNG FACTOR" "COPY TO DBG" "COPY N MM" "DBG DELVERY ST." "UNT SETTNGS" "SGNATURE" "EXT" 2 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

201 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 Basic display The menu "BASC DSPLAY" represents important characteristic values.. Hz %n Display for inhibited MOVMOT inverter NO ENABLE Hz %n Display for enabled MOVMOT inverter ENABLE NOTE 17: DSABLE REQURED nformation message Hz %n Error display ERROR Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 21

202 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Parameter mode n the menu "PARAMETER MODE", you can check and change parameter settings NFORMATON Parameters can only be changed if a Drive D module is plugged into the MOVMOT inverter and no additional function is activated. To change parameters in the parameter mode, proceed as follows: 1. Use the key to call up the context menu. The second menu item is "PARAMETER MODE". 2. Press the key to select "PARAMETER MODE". 3. Press the key to select "PARAMETER MODE". The first display parameter P "SPEED" appears. Use the or key to select main parameter groups to Press the key to activate the parameter subgroup selection in the required main parameter group. The flashing cursor moves one position to the right BASC VEW PARAMETER MODE MANUAL MODE BASC VEW PARAMETER MODE MANUAL MODE P1.. SETPONTS/ RAMP GENERATORS NO ENABLE P1.. SETPONTS/ RAMP GENERATORS NO ENABLE 5. Use the or key to select the desired parameter subgroup. The flashing cursor is positioned under the number of the parameter subgroup. P13. SPEED- RAMPS NO ENABLE 6. Press the key to activate the parameter selection in the required parameter subgroup. The flashing cursor moves one position to the right. P13. SPEED RAMPS NO ENABLE Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

203 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 7. Use the or key to select the desired parameter. The flashing cursor is positioned under the third digit of the parameter number. P131 RAMP T11 DOWN 1. s NO ENABLE 8. Use the key to activate the setting mode for the selected parameter. The cursor is positioned under the parameter value. P131 RAMP T11 DOWN s NO ENABLE 9. Use the or key to set the required parameter value. P131 RAMP T11 DOWN s NO ENABLE 1. Press the key to confirm the setting. To exit the setting mode, press the key. The flashing cursor is positioned under the third digit of the parameter number again. 11. Use the or key to select another parameter, or press the key to switch to the menu of the parameter subgroups. P131 RAMP T11 DOWN 1.3 NO ENABLE s Use the or key to select another parameter subgroup or press the key to switch to the menu of the main parameter groups. 13. Use the key to return to the context menu. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 23

204 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Manual mode Activation DANGER The AS-nterface signals take effect when the manual mode is deactivated. f the enable signal is present via the AS-nterface signals DO DO3, the MOVMOT drive can start up unintentionally when deactivating manual operation. Severe or fatal injuries from crushing. Set the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 to "" prior to deactivating manual mode. The MOVMOT drive is not ready for operation. Do not change the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 until after you have deactivated the manual mode. Proceed as follows to change to manual mode: 1. Use the key to switch to the context menu. 2. Use the or key to select "MANUAL MODE". Press the key to confirm your selection. The keypad is now in manual operation mode. NFORMATON You cannot change to manual mode when the drive is enabled or the brake is released. n this case, the message "NOTE 17: NV. ENABLED" appears for 2 seconds and the DBG keypad returns to the context menu. Display in manual mode [1] [2] [3] [6] %n RAMP SPEED. 1. BRAKE OFF %n RAMP SPEED. 1. BRAKE OFF [5] NO ENABLE MANUAL MODE [4] Display alternates every 2 s [1] Output current in [%] of N [2] Acceleration (speed ramps in [s] in relation to a setpoint step change of 15 rpm) [3] Speed in [rpm] [4] Manual mode display [5] nverter status [6] Brake status 24 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

205 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 Operation The following MOVMOT functions can be executed in the menu "MANUAL MODE": Setting the ramp time Press the key. Use the or key to set the required ramp time. Press the key to confirm your entry. Changing parameters Enter speed Use the key to switch between parameters "RAMP", "SPEED" and "BRAKE". Go to the "SPEED" parameter. The keypad shows the currently set "SPEED" parameter as flashing. Enter the required speed for manual operation using the digit keys <> to <9>. The sign determines the direction of rotation of the drive. Press the key to confirm your entry. Starting the drive Use the key to start the MOVMOT drive. During operation, the keypad displays the current motor current in [%] of the rated motor current N. Stopping the drive Use the key to stop the MOVMOT drive. Releasing the brake without drive enable Resetting an error Press the key to switch to the "BRAKE" menu item. Use the key or the key to release or engage the brake without drive enable. Press the key to confirm your selection. f an error occurs during manual operation, the display shows the following message: MANUAL MODE <OK> = RESET <DEL> = EXT ERROR CODE Display alternates every 2 s MANUAL MODE <OK> = RESET <DEL> = EXT ERROR TEXT Press the key to have the DBG keypad reset the error. During the error reset, the following message is displayed: MANUAL MODE PLEASE WAT... Manual mode remains active after error reset. The display shows the manual mode display again. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 25

206 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Deactivating manual mode Use the or key to deactivate the manual mode. The following query appears: ACTVATE AUTOMATC MODE? DEL=NO OK=YES Press the key to return to manual mode. Press the key to deactivate manual mode. The context menu appears. DANGER The AS-nterface signals take effect when the manual mode is deactivated. f the enable signal is present via the AS-nterface signals DO DO3, the MOVMOT drive can start up unintentionally when deactivating manual operation. Severe or fatal injuries from crushing. Set the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 to "" prior to deactivating manual mode. The MOVMOT drive is not ready for operation. Do not change the AS-nterface signals DO DO3 until after you have deactivated the manual mode. Scaling factors Description: Scaling factors are used for scaling the setpoint speeds F1 The decimal values of the scaling factors are divisors of the setpoint speed F1. Further, the setpoint depends on the setting of the setpoint potentiometer f1. A scaling factor is only effective if it has been selected by setting the according parameter bits P3 P Parameter bits P3 P2 P1 P Scaling factor Scaling factor 1 1 Scaling factor Scaling factor Scaling factor Example: F1 = 3 rpm (setpoint potentiometer f1 is in position 1) Parameter bits P3 P = i.e. scaling factor is effective. Scaling factor = 2 (see the following pages for the setting) => setpoint speed of the drive = 3 rpm / 2 = 15 rpm 26 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

207 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 Upload/download/reset: 1. Use the key to call up the context menu. 2. Press the key to select "SCALNG FACTOR". 3. Use the key to start the scaling factor mode. "UPLOAD" Use the key or the key to select "UPLOAD" in order to load the scaling factors from the MOVMOT inverter to the DBG keypad. "DOWNLOAD" Use the key or the key to select "DOWN- LOAD" in order to load the scaling factors from DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter BASC VEW PARAMETER MODE MANUAL MODE MANUAL MODE SCALNG FACTORS COPY TO DBG COPY TO MM SCALNG FACTORS UPLOAD DOWNLOAD RESET "RESET" Use the key or the key to select "RESET" in order to restore the default values for the scaling factors. Confirm your selection with. 4. Use the key to return to the context menu. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 27

208 1 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Setting: Proceed as follows to change the scaling factors of the setpoint speed: 1. Use the key to call up the context menu. 2. Use the or key to select "SCALNG FACTOR". Use the key to start the scaling factor mode. 3. Use the or key to select "SCALNG FACTOR". Use the key to start the mode for the scaling factor selection. 4. Use the or key to select the desired scaling factor BASC VEW PARAMETER MODE MANUAL MODE MANUAL MODE SCALNG FACTORS COPY TO DBG COPY TO MM SCALNG FACTORS UPLOAD DOWNLOAD RESET SCALNG FACTORS 5. Use the key to activate the setting mode for the selected scaling factor. The selected scaling factor is displayed. SCALNG FACTOR SCALNG FACTOR SCALNG FACTOR Use the or key to set the required scaling factor value. As an alternative, you can enter the value with the numeric keys <> to <9> Press the key to confirm the setting. To exit the setting mode, press the key. 8. Use the key or the key to select a different scaling factor are return to the context menu via the key. 28 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

209 Operation DBG keypad (only in conjunction with MLK3A) 1 Copy function of the DBG keypad You can use the DBG keypad to copy the complete parameter set from one MOVMOT inverter to other MOVMOT inverters as follows: 1. n the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO DBG". Press the key to confirm your selection. The data is copied from the MOVMOT inverter to the DBG keypad. SCALNG FACTORS COPY TO DBG COPY TO MM UNT SETTNG COPYNG DATA After the copying process, connect the DBG keypad to another MOVMOT inverter. 3. n the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO MM". Press the key to confirm your selection. The data is copied from the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter SCALNG FACTORS COPY TO DBG COPY TO MM UNT SETTNG COPYNG DATA Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 29

210 11 Service Status and error display 11 Service 11.1 Status and error display The following figure shows the position of the status and AS-nterface LED on the MOVMOT drive: [1] [2] [1] MOVMOT status LED [2] AS-nterface LED Meaning of the AS-nterface LED The AS-nterface LED signalizes the status of the AS-nterface slaves. MLK3A LED LED status Operating state Description color Off Not ready No 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface Green lluminated Ready Normal operation 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface OK Communication present Red lluminated Not ready Communication interrupted or slave address = Red/ green Flashes regularly Not ready Communication or peripheral error MLK31A LED LED status Operating state Description color Off Not ready No 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface Green lluminated Ready Normal operation 24 V supply connected to the AS-nterface OK Communication present Red lluminated Not ready Communication error at A or B slave Red Flashes regularly Not ready Protocol error, no CTT3 communication with A slave or no CTT2 communication with B slave Yellow/ red Flashes regularly Not ready Slave address = Red/ green Flashes regularly Not ready Peripheral error at A or B slave. There is no communication between MLK31A and the MOVMOT inverter. 21 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

211 Service Status and error display Meaning of the status LED LED LED status Error code Description color Off Not ready No 24 V power supply Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Green /yellow Flashes steadily Not ready Self-test phase active or 24 V power supply present but supply voltage not OK Flashes evenly, fast Ready Brake release without drive enable active (only with S2/2 = "ON") Steady light 2x flashing, break Flashes with alternating colors Ready, but unit inhibited Ready, but manual operation without unit enable Ready, but timeout 24 V power supply and supply voltage OK, but no enable signal f drive does not run when enable signal is present - check startup! 24 V power supply and supply voltage OK Stop manual mode to activate automatic mode Faulty communication with cyclical data exchange Green Steady light Unit enabled Motor in operation Green Flashes evenly, fast Current limit active Drive operating at current limit Green Flashes steadily Ready Standstill current function active Red Steady light Not ready Check the 24 V supply. Make sure that there is a smoothed DC voltage with low ripple (residual ripple max. 13%) present Red 2x flashing, break Error 7 DC link voltage too high Red Flashes slowly Error 8 Speed monitoring error (only with S2/4 = "ON" or additional function 13 has been activated) Error 9 Startup error Additional functions 4, 5, 12 (DP switches S2/5 S2/8) are not permitted or incompatibility between MOVMOT firmware version and AS-nterface option Error 9 ncorrect motor/inverter assignment Errors 17 to 24, 37 CPU error Error 25, 94 EEPROM error Error 97 Parameter transmission error Error 99 Firmware does not support MLK31A option Red 3x flashing, break Error 1 Overcurrent in output stage Error 11 Overtemperature in output stage Red 4x flashing, break Error 84 Overload in motor Red 5x flashing, break Error 89 Overtemperature in brake ncorrect motor/inverter assignment Red 6x flashing, break Error 6 Mains phase failure Error 81 Start condition 1) Error 82 Output phases interrupted 1) 1) Only for hoist applications Status LED flash codes Flashing steadily: Flashing evenly, fast: Flashing with alternating colors: N x flashing, pause: LED 6 ms on, 6 ms off LED 1 ms on, 3 ms off LED 6 ms green, 6 ms yellow LED N x (6 ms red, 3 ms off), then LED off for 1 s Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 211

212 11 Service Status and error display Error list Error Communication timeout (motor stops, without error code 43) DC link voltage too low, supply system off was detected (motor stops, without error code) Error code 1 Overcurrent in output stage Error code 6 Phase failure (The error can only be detected when the drive is at load) Error code 7 DC link voltage too high Error code 8 Speed monitoring Error code 9 Startup error Error code 11 Thermal overload of the output stage or internal unit error Error codes 17 to 24, 37 CPU error Error code 25 EEPROM error Error code 43 Communication timeout Error code 81 Start condition error Error code 82 Output open error Cause / solution nternal communication error Contact SEW Service. Check supply system leads, supply voltage and AUX power supply for interruption. Check the value of the AUX power supply voltage (permitted voltage range: 24 V ± 25%, EN residual ripple max. 13%) Motor restarts automatically as soon as the voltage reaches normal values. Short circuit on inverter output. Check the connection between the inverter output and the motor as well as the motor winding for short circuits. Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Check the supply system cable for phase failure. Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Ramp time too short ncrease ramp time Faulty connection between brake coil/braking resistor Check the connection between braking resistor and brake coil. and correct it, if necessary ncorrect internal resistance of brake coil/braking resistor Check internal resistance of brake coil/braking resistor (see section "Technical Data"). Thermal overload in braking resistor Wrong size of braking resistor selected nvalid voltage range of the supply input voltage Check supply input voltage for valid voltage range Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Speed monitoring has triggered, load on the drive is too high Reduce the load on the drive Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Additional function 4, 5, 12 are not permitted for MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface. Correct the settings of DP switches S2/5 S2/8. or incompatibility between MOVMOT firmware version and AS-nterface option. Clean the heat sink Lower ambient temperature Prevent heat build-up Reduce the load on the drive Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Consult the SEW Service if the error reoccurs. Error while accessing EEPROM Set parameter P82 to "Delivery state" via the diagnostics socket. Reset the error and parameterize MOVMOT. Consult the SEW Service if the error reoccurs. nternal communication error Contact SEW Service. The motor could not be supplied with the correct amount of current during the pre-magnetizing time. Rated motor power too small in relation to rated inverter power Motor cable cross section too small Check connection between MOVMOT inverter and motor. 2 or all output phases interrupted Rated motor power too small in relation to rated inverter power Check connection between MOVMOT inverter and motor. 212 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

213 Service Status and error display 11 Error Error code 84 Thermal overload of motor Error code 89 Thermal overload of brake coil or brake coil defective, brake coil connected incorrectly Error code 94 EEPROM checksum error Cause / solution When the MOVMOT inverter is installed close to the motor, set DP switch S1/5 to "ON" For combinations of "MOVMOT and motor with one lower power rating", check the setting of DP switch S1/6 Lower ambient temperature Prevent heat build-up Reduce the load on the motor ncrease the speed f the error occurs soon after the initial startup, check the combination of drive and MOVMOT inverter Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. ncrease the set ramp time Brake inspection (see "DR , 315 AC Motors" operating instructions) Check brake coil connection Contact SEW Service Check the combination of the drive (brake coil) and MOVMOT inverter if the error is signaled shortly after the first enable. For combinations of "MOVMOT and motor with one lower power rating", check the setting of DP switch S1/6. Reset the error via AS-nterface signals or via diagnostics socket. Defective EEPROM Contact SEW Service. Error code 97 Copy error Error code 99 MOVMOT firmware not compatible with MLK3.A option DBG keypad or PC disconnected during the copy process Power supply interruption during copy process Before acknowledging the error, load the factory setting or the complete data record from the keypad or the MOVTOOLS MotionStudio software. The firmware of the MOVMOT inverter does not support the connected MLK3.A option. Contact SEW Service. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 213

214 11 Service Diagnostics with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 11.2 Diagnostics with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio MOVMOT drives with integrated AS-interface have a diagnostic interface for startup and service. This interface allows for diagnostics with the SEW MOVTOOLS Motion- Studio software. DANGER Before removing / fitting the MOVMOT inverter, you must disconnect it from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to one minute after disconnection from the power supply. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. WARNNG The surfaces of MOVMOT and external options, e.g. braking resistor (especially the heat sink), can become very hot during operation. Danger of burns. Do not touch the MOVMOT drive and external options until they have cooled down sufficiently. Proceed as follows: 1. Connect the PC or the DBG keypad to the MOVMOT inverter. See section "PC connection" (page 5). 2. Connect the MOVMOT inverter to the voltage supply. 3. Start MOVTOOLS MotionStudio and integrate the MOVMOT inverter. See section "ntegrating MOVMOT in MOVTOOLS MotionStudio". (page 133) 4. Open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button and select the menu item "Startup" / "Parameter tree". 214 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

215 Service Diagnostics with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio 11 The following window is displayed during operation with the MLK3A option: The parameters P94 and P97 are used as bus monitor of the AS-nterface and display the transmission of AS-nterface bits from and to the MOVMOT inverter. The following table shows the assignment of the AS-nterface output bits: ndex Subindex Bit AS-nterface bit Meaning with MLK3A 1) DO CW operation/stop DO1 CCW operation/stop DO2 Speed f2/speed f DO3 Reset/controller enable P Parameter bit P1 Parameter bit P2 Parameter bit P3 Parameter bit 3 The following table shows the assignment of the AS-nterface input bits: ndex Subindex Bit AS-nterface bit Meaning with MLK3A 1) D Ready signal D1 Automatic operation/manual operation D2 Sensor input D3 Sensor input 2 1) With the MLK31A option, the meaning of the AS-nterface bits is determined by the selected function modules. For diagnostics purposes, the parameter tree provides additional data such as unit status, process data etc. 5. After diagnostics, reinsert the screw plug of the (X5) diagnostics interface with sealing. NOTCE The enclosure specified in section Technical Data only applies if the screw plugs of the setpoint potentiometer and the X5 diagnostic interface are installed correctly. Missing or incorrectly installed screw plugs can cause damage to the MOVMOT inverter. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 215

216 11 Service Unit replacement 11.3 Unit replacement DANGER When working on the unit, dangerous voltage levels may still be present up to one minute after the mains is disconnected. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. Disconnect the MOVMOT drive from the power supply using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply. Then wait at least for 1 minute. 1. Remove the screws and take off the MOVMOT inverter from the terminal box. 2. Compare the data on the nameplate of the previous MOVMOT inverter with the data on the nameplate of the new MOVMOT inverter. NOTCE The previous MOVMOT inverter can only be replaced by a MOVMOT inverter with the same part number. 3. Set all controls DP switch S1 DP switch S2 Setpoint potentiometer f1 Switch f2 Switch t1 on the new MOVMOT inverter analogously to the controls of the previous MOVMOT inverter. 216 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

217 Service Unit replacement Unlock the Drive D module of the new MOVMOT inverter and pull it out carefully Unlock the Drive D module of the previous MOVMOT inverter as well and pull it out carefully. nsert this Drive D module into the new MOVMOT inverter. Make sure that the Drive D module locks in place. 6. Place the new MOVMOT inverter onto the terminal box and screw it on. 7. Supply voltage to the MOVMOT inverter. Check whether the new MOVMOT inverter is functioning properly. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 217

218 11 Service SEW Service 11.4 SEW Service f an error cannot be remedied, please contact SEW Service (see "Address List"). Please have the following information at hand when you consult the SEW Service: Service code [1] Unit designation on inverter nameplate [2] Part number [3] Serial number [4] Type designation on motor nameplate [5] Serial number [6] Brief description of the application Nature of the error Accompanying circumstances (e.g. initial startup) Your own assumptions Any unusual events preceding the problem, etc. [1] Status: A / [2] Typ MM15D-53- [3] Sach.Nr Serien Nr [4] Eingang / nput Ausgang / Output CH1 U= 3x38...5V AC U= 3xV...U nput D Bruchsal f= 5...6Hz f= Hz N2936 Made in Germany = 3.5A AC = 4.A AC MOVMOT T= C Antriebsumrichter P-Motor 1.5kW / 2.HP Drive nverter P-Motor (S3/25%): 2.2kW / 3.3HP Use 6/75 C copper wire only. Tighten terminals to 13,3in. - ibs.(1.5 Nm) Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5ms [5] [6] Bruchsal/Germany RF47DRE9L4BE2/MM15/MO/AVSK C V 38-5 Hz 5-6 A 3.5 so.kl. 155(F) kw 1.5 Hz 5 r/min 14/86 CT 1:5 TEFC Nm 166 P 54 M.L. 2 M M1 kg 31 3~ V BR Nm 13 kw 1.5 Hz 5 eff % CLP CC VGB22.65 Made in Germany Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

219 Service Extended storage Extended storage f the unit is being stored for a long time, connect it to the line voltage for at least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced Procedure when maintenance has been neglected Electrolytic capacitors are used in the inverters. They are subject to aging effects when deenergized. This effect can damage the capacitors if the unit is connected using the rated voltage after a longer period of storage. f you have not performed maintenance regularly, SEW-EURODRVE recommends that you increase the line voltage slowly up to the maximum voltage. This can be done, for example, by using a variable transformer for which the output voltage has been set according to the following overview. After you have completed the regeneration process, the unit can be used immediately or stored again for an extended period with maintenance. The following stages are recommended: AC 4/5 V units: Stage 1: AC V to AC 35 V within a few seconds Stage 2: AC 35 V for 15 minutes Stage 3: AC 42 V for 15 minutes Stage 4: AC 5 V for 1 hour 11.6 Disposal This product consists of: ron Aluminum Copper Plastic Electronic components Dispose of all components in accordance with applicable regulations! Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 219

220 12 Technical Data Motor with operating point 4 V / 5 Hz or 4 V / 1 Hz 12 Technical Data 12.1 Motor with operating point 4 V / 5 Hz or 4 V / 1 Hz MOVMOT type MM 3D- 53- MM 5D- 53- MM 7D- 53- MM 11D- 53- MM 15D- 53- MM 22D- 53- MM 3D- 53- MM 4D- 53- Part number Apparent output power at V supply = AC 38-5 V Supply voltages Permitted range Size 1 Size 2 Size 2L S N 1.1 kva 1.4 kva 1.8 kva 2.2 kva 2.8 kva 3.8 kva 5.1 kva 6.7 kva V line AC 3 x 38 V / 4 V / 415 V / 46 V / 5 V V supply = AC 38 V 1% AC 5 V +1% Supply frequency f supply 5 6 Hz ±1% Nominal line current supply AC 1.3 A AC 1.6 A AC 1.9 A AC 2.4 A AC 3.5 A AC 5. A AC 6.7 A AC 7.3 A (at V supply = AC 4 V) Output voltage V O V supply Output frequency Resolution f o 2 12 Hz.1 Hz Operating point 4 V at 5 Hz/1 Hz Rated output current N AC 1.6 A AC 2. A AC 2.5 A AC 3.2 A AC 4. A AC 5.5 A AC 7.3 A AC 8.7 A Motor power S1 P Mot.37 kw.5 HP.55 kw.75 HP.75 kw 1. HP PWM frequency 4 (factory setting) / 8 / 16 1) khz Current limitation max Motor: 16% at and Regenerative: 16% at and Maximum motor cable length 1.1 kw 1.5 HP 1.5 kw 2. HP 15 m when the MOVMOT inverter is installed close to the motor (with SEW hybrid cable) 2.2 kw 3. HP 3. kw 4. HP External braking resistor R min 15 Ω 68 Ω nterference immunity Complies with EN kw 5.4 HP nterference emission Complies with category C2 according to EN (limit class A to EN 5511 and EN 5514) Ambient temperature ϑ A 25 to +4 C depending on the motor P N reduction: 3% N per K to max. 6 C Climate class EN , class 3K3 Storage temperature 2) 3 to +85 C (EN , class 3K3) Maximum permitted According to EN 5178 vibration and shock load Degree of protection (depending on the motor) Operating mode Cooling type (DN 41751) nstallation altitude Required preventive measures P54, P55, P65 (optional, specify when ordering) P67 (only possible for inverter with terminal box) S1 (EN and 1-3), S3 max. cycle duration 1 minutes Self-cooling h 1, m: No reduction h > 1 m: N reduction by 1% per 1 m h > 2 m: V supply reduction by AC 6 V per 1 m, overvoltage class 2 according to DN 11-1 h max = 4, m See section "nstallation altitudes above 1 m msl" (page 31) Ground the unit 1) 16 khz PWM frequency (low-noise): When DP SWTCH S1/7 = ON, the units operate with a 16 khz PWM frequency (low noise) and switch back in steps to lower switching frequencies depending on the heat sink temperature and the load. 2) f the unit is stored for a long time, connect it to the mains voltage for at least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced. 22 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

221 Technical Data Motor with operating point 46 V / 6 Hz Motor with operating point 46 V / 6 Hz MOVMOT type MM 3D- 53- MM 5D- 53- MM 7D- 53- MM 11D- 53- MM 15D- 53- MM 22D- 53- MM 3D- 53- MM 4D- 53- Part number Size 1 Size 2 Size 2L Apparent output power at V supply = AC 38-5 V S N 1.1 kva 1.4 kva 1.8 kva 2.2 kva 2.8 kva 3.8 kva 5.1 kva 6.7 kva Supply voltages Permitted range V line AC 3 x 38 V / 4 V / 415 V / 46 V / 5 V V supply = AC 38 V 1% AC 5 V +1% Supply frequency f supply 5 6 Hz ±1% Nominal line current (at V supply = AC 46 V) supply AC 1.1 A AC 1.4 A AC 1.7 A AC 2.1 A AC 3. A AC 4.3 A AC 5.8 A AC 6.9 A Output voltage V O V supply Output frequency Resolution Operating point f o 2 12 Hz.1 Hz 46 V at 6 Hz Rated output current N AC 1.6 A AC 2. A AC 2.5 A AC 3.2 A AC 4. A AC 5.5 A AC 7.3 A AC 8.7 A Motor power P Mot.37 kw.5 HP PWM frequency.55 kw.75 HP.75 kw 1. HP 4 (factory setting) / 8 / 16 1) khz Current limitation max Motor: 16% with Regenerative: 16% with Maximum motor cable length 1.1 kw 1.5 HP 1.5 kw 2 HP 15 m when the MOVMOT inverter is installed close to the motor (with SEW hybrid cable) 2.2 kw 3. HP External braking resistor R min 15 Ω 68 Ω nterference immunity Complies with EN kw 5 HP 4kW 5.4 HP nterference emission Complies with category C2 according to EN (limit class A to EN 5511 and EN 5514) Ambient temperature ϑ A 25 to +4 C depending on the motor P N reduction: 3% N per K to max. 6 C Climate class Storage temperature 2) Maximum permitted vibration and shock load Degree of protection (depending on the motor) Operating mode Cooling type (DN 41751) nstallation altitude Required preventive measures EN , class 3K3 3 to +85 C (EN , class 3K3) According to EN 5178 P54, P55, P65 (optional, specify when ordering) P67 (only possible for inverter with terminal box) S1 (EN and 1-3), S3 max. cycle duration 1 minutes Self-cooling h 1, m: No reduction h > 1 m: N reduction by 1% per 1 m h > 2 m: V supply reduction by AC 6 V per 1 m, overvoltage class 2 according to DN 11-1 h max = 4, m See section "nstallation altitudes above 1 m msl" (page 31) Ground the unit 1) 16 khz PWM frequency (low-noise): When DP SWTCH S1/7 = ON, the units operate with a 16 khz PWM frequency (low noise) and switch back in steps to lower switching frequencies depending on the heat sink temperature and the load. 2) f the unit is stored for a long time, connect it to the mains voltage for at least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced. Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 221

222 12 Technical Data Motor with operating point 23 V / 5 Hz 12.3 Motor with operating point 23 V / 5 Hz MOVMOT type MM 3D MM 5D MM 7D MM 11D MM 15D MM 22D Part number Size 1 Size 2 Apparent output power at V supply = AC 2-24 V S N 1. kva 1.3 kva 1.7 kva 2. kva 2.9 kva 3.4 kva Supply voltages Permitted range V line AC 3 x 2 V / 23 V / 24 V V supply = AC 2 V 1% AC 24 V +1% Supply frequency f supply 5 6 Hz ±1% Nominal line current (at V supply = AC 23 V) supply AC 1.9 A AC 2.4 A AC 3.5 A AC 5. A AC 6.7 A AC 7.3 A Output voltage V O V supply Output frequency Resolution Operating point f o 2 12 Hz.1 Hz 23 V at 6 Hz Rated output current N AC 2.5 A AC 3.2 A AC 4. A AC 5.5 A AC 7.3 A AC 8.7 A Motor power S1 P Mot.37 kw.5 HP.55 kw.75 HP PWM frequency 4 (factory setting) / 8 / 16 1) khz Current limitation max Motor: 16% with Regenerative: 16% with Maximum motor cable length.75 kw 1. HP 1.1 kw 1.5 HP 15 m when the MOVMOT inverter is installed close to the motor (with SEW hybrid cable) 1.5 kw 2. HP External braking resistor R min 15 Ω 68 Ω nterference immunity Complies with EN kw 3. HP nterference emission Complies with category C2 according to EN (limit class A to EN 5511 and EN 5514) Ambient temperature ϑ A 25 to +4 C depending on the motor P N reduction: 3% N per K to max. 6 C Climate class Storage temperature 2) Maximum permitted vibration and shock load Degree of protection (depending on the motor) Operating mode Cooling type (DN 41751) nstallation altitude Required preventive measures EN , class 3K3 3 to +85 C (EN , class 3K3) According to EN 5178 P54, P55, P65 (optional, specify when ordering) P67 (only possible for inverter with terminal box) S1 (EN and 1-3), S3 max. cycle duration 1 minutes Self-cooling h 1, m: No reduction h > 1 m: N reduction by 1% per 1 m h > 2 m: V supply reduction by AC 3 V per 1 m, overvoltage class 2 according to DN 11-1 h max = 4, m See section "nstallation altitudes above 1 m msl" (page 31) Ground the unit 1) 16 khz PWM frequency (low-noise): When DP SWTCH S1/7 = ON, the units operate with a 16 khz PWM frequency (low noise) and switch back in steps to lower switching frequencies depending on the heat sink temperature and the load. 2) f the unit is stored for a long time, connect it to the mains voltage for at least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced. 222 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

223 Technical Data AS-nterface technical data kva i P f Hz n AS-nterface technical data AS-nterface External electronics supply Tl. 24V Tl. Control input Tl. AS + Tl. AS - Sensor connection Tl. D2 Tl. D3 Tl. V24 Tl. V AS-nterface: AUX-PWR (optional): E only AS-nterface: E AS-nterface + AUX-PWR: Sensor inputs PLC-compatible to EN , R i about 3. kω E about 1 ma Signal level +15 V +3 V 3 V +5 V Maximum sensor cable 15 m length 29.5 V 31.6 V (AS-nterface power supply to EN 5295) 24 V ± 25%, EN residual ripple max. 13% input capacitance: 12 μf) A PELV power supply (Protective Extra Low Voltage) to EC with safe disconnection is mandatory for the AUX PWR auxiliary supply. 2 ma 1) (typically 12 ma at 3 V) 4 ma (typically 25 ma at 3 V) + 2 ma 1) (typically 12 ma at 24 V) Connection of the AS-interface data line Connection of the AS-interface data line External sensor input External sensor input 24 V for sensor supply Reference potential for sensor supply 1) The current increases by the demand of the connected sensors (max 1 ma) "1" "" AS-interface MLK3A binary slave AS-nterface MLK3A Protocol variant AS-nterface profile /O configuration D code ext. D code2 ext. D code1 Address AS-interface binary slave with a S-7.F profile "four bit /O mode slave" S-7.F 7 hex F hex E hex F hex 1 31 (factory setting: ), can be changed as often as required AS-nterface MLK31A double slave AS-nterface MLK31A Slave A Slave B Protocol variant AS-nterface double slave in extended address mode AS-nterface specification V3., rev.2 in conjunction with M4 master profile AS-nterface profile S-7.A.7.7 S-7.A.5.F /O configuration 7 hex 7 hex D code A hex A hex ext. D code2 7 hex 5 hex ext. D code1 7 hex F hex Function 4D/4DO cyclical 4PD/3PDO serial acyclic Address 1 31 (factory setting: ), can be changed as often as required Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 223

224 12 kva i P f Hz n Technical Data Technical data of options 12.5 Technical data of options MLU13A Option MLU13A Part number Function 24 V voltage supply nput voltage AC 38 5 V ±1% (5/6 Hz) Output voltage DC 24 V ± 25% Output power Max. 8 W Degree of protection P2 Ambient temperature C Storage temperature C MNF21A (in preparation) Option MNF21A (only for MM3D-53- MM15D-53-) Part number Function 3-phase line filter (allows for category C1 to EN 618-3) nput voltage AC 3 x 38 V ±1% / 5 6 Hz nput current 4 A Degree of protection P Ambient temperature C Storage temperature C URM Option URM Part number Function Voltage relay, ensures quick application of the mechanical brake Rated voltage V N DC V (Brake coil AC 88 4 V) Braking current N.75 A Degree of protection P2 Ambient temperature C Storage temperature C Disconnection time t off about 4 ms (cut-off in the DC circuit) 224 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

225 Technical Data Technical data of options kva i P f Hz n BEM NOTCE f the connection voltage is too high, the BEM brake rectifier or the brake coil connected to it can be damaged. The brake coil must correspond to the connection voltage! Option BEM Part number Function Brake rectifier Nominal supply voltage AC 23 V AC 5 V +1 % / 15 % 5 6 Hz ±5% Black connection wires Control voltage DC 5 V Red/blue connecting wires Braking current max. DC.8 A Brake connection 13, 14, 15 Degree of protection P2 Ambient temperature C Storage temperature C DBG (only in conjunction with MLK3A) Option DBG6B-1 DBG6B-2 DBG6B-3 DBG6B-4 Part number Language German English French talian German English French Finnish German English French Russian German English French Chinese Spanish Portuguese Dutch Swedish Danish Turkish Polish Czech Function Keypad Connection RJ-1 plug for connection to the X5 diagnostics interface Degree of protection P4 (EN 6529) Ambient temperature +4 C Storage temperature 2 +8 C Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 225

226 12 kva i P f Hz n Technical Data Work done, working air gap and braking torque of the brake 12.6 Work done, working air gap and braking torque of the brake Brake type Work done until maintenance [1 6 J] min. 1) Working air gap Brake disk Braking torque settings [mm] [mm] Braking torque BE BE BE BE BE Type and number of brake springs Order numbers for brake springs max. min. [Nm] Normal Blue Normal Blue 1) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may cause deviations of ±.15 mm after a test run X X Braking torque assignment Motor type Brake type Braking torque steps [Nm] DR.71 BE BE BE DR.8 BE BE BE DR.9 BE BE DR.1 BE BE DR.112 BE BE DR.132 BE BE Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT type Preferred brake voltage MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 1 (MM3.. to MM15..). 23 V MOVMOT MM..D-53, size 2 (MM22.. to MM4..) MOVMOT MM..D-233, size 1 and 2 (MM3.. to MM4..) 12 V 226 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

227 Technical Data Diagnostics interface kva i P f Hz n Diagnostics interface Diagnostic interface X5 Standard RS-485 to EA standard (with integrated dynamic terminating resistor) Baud rate 9.6 kbaud Start bits 1 start bit Stop bits 1 stop bit Data bits 8 data bits Parity 1 parity bit, completing for even parity (even parity) Operating mode asynchronous, semi-duplex Connection RJ1 socket 12.9 Assignment of internal braking resistors MOVMOT type Braking resistor Part number MM3D-53- MM15D-53- MM3D-233- MM7D-233- BW ) MM22D-53- MM4D-53- MM11D-233- MM22D-233- BW ) 1) Two screws M4 x 8, included in scope of delivery Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 227

228 12 kva i P f Hz n Technical Data Assignment of external braking resistors 12.1 Assignment of external braking resistors MOVMOT type Braking resistor Part number Protective grid BW2-3/K X MM3D-53- MM15D-53- MM3D-233- MM7D-233- BW2-5/K BW BW1-3/K X MM22D-53- MM4D-53- BW1-5/K MM11D-233- MM22D-233- BW BW BW1.. BW2.. BW1-3/ K -1.5 BW1-5/ K -1.5 BW2-3/ K -1.5 BW2-5/ K -1.5 Part number Function Dissipating the regenerative energy Degree of protection P65 Resistance 1 Ω 1 Ω 2 Ω 2 Ω Power 1 W 2 W 1 W 2 W in S1, 1% cdf Dimensions W x H x D 146 x 15 x 8 mm 252 x 15 x 8 mm 146 x 15 x 8 mm 252 x 15 x 8 mm Cable length 1.5 m BW15.. BW68.. BW15-1 BW68-1 BW68-2 Part number Function Dissipating the regenerative energy Degree of protection P66 Resistance 15 Ω 68 Ω 68 Ω Power according to UL 6 W 6 W 12 W in S1, 1% cdf Power according to CE 9 W 9 W 18 W in S1, 1% cdf Dimensions W x H x D 26 x 75 x 174 mm 26 x 75 x 174 mm 61 x 75 x 174 mm Max. perm. cable length 15 m Resistance and assignment of the brake coil Brake Resistance of the brake coil 1) 12 V 23 V 4 V BE5 78 Ω 312 Ω 985 Ω BE1 78 Ω 312 Ω 985 Ω BE2 58 Ω 232 Ω 732 Ω BE5 51 Ω 2 Ω 64 Ω BE11 33 Ω 13 Ω 412 Ω 1) Rated value measured between the red connection (terminal 13) and the blue connection (terminal 15) at 2 C, temperature-dependent fluctuations in the range 25% to +4% are possible. 228 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

229 Technical Data Assignment of the Drive-D module kva i P f Hz n Assignment of the Drive-D module Type Motor Supply voltage [V] Supply frequency [Hz] Drive-D module dentification D color Part number DRS 23 / 4 5 DRS/4/5 White DRE 23 / 4 5 DRE/4/5 Orange DRS 266 / 46 6 DRS/46/6 Yellow DRE 266 / 46 6 DRE/46/6 Green DRS / DRE 22 / 38 6 DRS/DRE/38/6 Red DRS / DRE / / DRS/DRE5/6 Violet DRP 23 / 4 5 DRP/23/4 Brown DRP 266 / 46 6 DRP/266/46 Beige Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 229

230 kva Declaration of Conformity 13 f i n P Hz 13 Declaration of Conformity EC Declaration of Conformity Bruchsal Johann Soder Place Date Managing Director Technology a) b) a) Authorized representative for issuing this declaration on behalf of the manufacturer b) Authorized representative for compiling the technical documents 23 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

231 Address List kva i P f n Hz Address List Germany Headquarters Production Sales Service Competence Center Bruchsal SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 D Bruchsal P.O. Box Postfach 323 D Bruchsal Central SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 D Graben-Neudorf North SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Alte Ricklinger Straße 4-42 D-3823 Garbsen (near Hannover) East SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Dänkritzer Weg 1 D-8393 Meerane (near Zwickau) South SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Domagkstraße 5 D Kirchheim (near München) West SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Siemensstraße 1 D-4764 Langenfeld (near Düsseldorf) Electronics SEW-EURODRVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 D Bruchsal Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service France Production Sales Service Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request! Haguenau SEW-USOCOME route de Soufflenheim B. P F-6756 Haguenau Cedex Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Zone ndustrielle Technopôle Forbach Sud B. P F-5764 Forbach Cedex Assembly Sales Service Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Parc d'activités de Magellan 62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182 F-3367 Pessac Cedex Lyon SEW-USOCOME Parc d'affaires Roosevelt Rue Jacques Tati F-6912 Vaulx en Velin Nantes SEW-USOCOME ZAC de la Forêt 4 rue des Fontenelles F-4414 Le Bignon Paris SEW-USOCOME Zone industrielle 2 rue Denis Papin F-7739 Verneuil 'Etang Additional addresses for service in France provided on request! 231

232 kva Address List 14 f i n P Hz Algeria Sales Alger REDUCOM Sarl 16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Bellevue 162 El Harrach Alger Argentina Assembly Sales Service Australia Assembly Sales Service Buenos Aires Melbourne SEW EURODRVE ARGENTNA S.A. Centro ndustrial Garin, Lote 35 Ruta Panamericana Km 37, Garin SEW-EURODRVE PTY. LTD. 27 Beverage Drive Tullamarine, Victoria 343 Austria Assembly Sales Service Sydney Wien SEW-EURODRVE PTY. LTD. 9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park New South Wales, 2164 SEW-EURODRVE Ges.m.b.H. Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 A-123 Wien Belarus Sales Minsk SEW-EURODRVE BY RybalkoStr. 26 BY-2233 Minsk Belgium Assembly Sales Service Brussels SEW Caron-Vector Avenue Eiffel 5 BE-13 Wavre Service Competence Center ndustrial Gears SEW Caron-Vector Rue de Parc ndustriel, 31 BE-69 Marche-en-Famenne Antwerp SEW Caron-Vector Glasstraat, 19 BE-217 Merksem Brazil Production Sales Service Sao Paulo SEW-EURODRVE Brasil Ltda. Avenida Amâncio Gaiolli, Rodovia Presidente Dutra Km 28 Guarulhos SP SAT - SEW ATENDE Bulgaria Sales Sofia BEVER-DRVE GmbH Bogdanovetz Str.1 BG-166 Sofia 232 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

233 Address List 14 Cameroon Sales Douala Electro-Services Rue Drouot Akwa B.P. 224 Douala Canada Assembly Sales Service Toronto SEW-EURODRVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 21 Walker Drive Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 Vancouver SEW-EURODRVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tilbury ndustrial Park 7188 Honeyman Street Delta, BC V4G 1G1 Montreal SEW-EURODRVE CO. OF CANADA LTD Rue Leger Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request! Chile Assembly Sales Service Santiago de Chile SEW-EURODRVE CHLE LTDA. Las Encinas 1295 Parque ndustrial Valle Grande LAMPA RCH-Santiago de Chile P.O. Box Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile China Production Assembly Sales Service Assembly Sales Service Tianjin SEW-EURODRVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Tianjin 3457 Suzhou SEW-EURODRVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. 333, Suhong Middle Road Suzhou ndustrial Park Jiangsu Province, Guangzhou SEW-EURODRVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. No. 9, JunDa Road East Section of GETDD Guangzhou 5153 Shenyang SEW-EURODRVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. 1A-2, 6th Road Shenyang Economic Technological Development Area Shenyang, Wuhan SEW-EURODRVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. 1A-2, 6th Road No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA 4356 Wuhan Xi'An SEW-EURODRVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Xi'An High-Technology ndustrial Development Zone Xi'An 7165 Additional addresses for service in China provided on request! Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 233

234 14 Address List Colombia Assembly Sales Service Bogotá SEW-EURODRVE COLOMBA LTDA. Calle 22 No Bodega 6, Manzana B Santafé de Bogotá Croatia Sales Service Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Zeleni dol 1 HR 1 Zagreb Czech Republic Sales Prague SEW-EURODRVE CZ S.R.O. Business Centrum Praha Lužná 591 CZ-16 Praha 6 - Vokovice Denmark Assembly Sales Service Copenhagen SEW-EURODRVEA/S Geminivej 28-3 DK-267 Greve Egypt Sales Service Cairo Copam Egypt for Engineering & Agencies 33 E Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo Estonia Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Reti tee 4 EE-7531 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa Finland Assembly Sales Service Lahti SEW-EURODRVE OY Vesimäentie 4 FN-1586 Hollola 2 Production Assembly Karkkila SEW ndustrial Gears Oy Valurinkatu 6, PL 8 F-36 Karkkila, 361 Karkkila Gabon Sales Libreville ESG Electro Services Gabun Feu Rouge Lalala 1889 Libreville Gabun Great Britain Assembly Sales Service Normanton SEW-EURODRVE Ltd. Beckbridge ndustrial Estate P.O. Box No.1 GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR 234 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

235 Address List 14 Greece Sales Service Hong Kong Assembly Sales Service Hungary Sales Service ndia Registered Office Assembly Sales Service Athens Hong Kong Budapest Vadodara Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. 12, K. Mavromichali Street P.O. Box 8136 GR Piraeus SEW-EURODRVE LTD. Unit No , 8th Floor Hong Leong ndustrial Complex No. 4, Wang Kwong Road Kowloon, Hong Kong SEW-EURODRVE Kft. H-137 Budapest Kunigunda u. 18 SEW-EURODRVE ndia Private Limited Plot No. 4, GDC POR Ramangamdi Vadodara Gujarat Assembly Sales Service reland Sales Service Chennai Dublin SEW-EURODRVE ndia Private Limited Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot ndustrial Park Phase Mambakkam Village Sriperumbudur Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu Alperton Engineering Ltd. 48 Moyle Road Dublin ndustrial Estate Glasnevin, Dublin 11 srael Sales Tel-Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Ahofer Str 34B / Holon taly Assembly Sales Service Solaro SEW-EURODRVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Via Bernini,14-22 Solaro (Milano) vory Coast Sales Abidjan SCA Société industrielle & commerciale pour l'afrique 165, Boulevard de Marseille 26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 235

236 14 Address List Japan Assembly Sales Service wata SEW-EURODRVE JAPAN CO., LTD 25-1, Shimoman-no, wata Shizuoka Kazakhstan Sales Almaty ТОО "СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙВ" 561, Республика Казахстан г.алматы, пр.райымбека, 348 Latvia Sales Riga SA Alas-Kuul Katlakalna 11C LV-173 Riga Lebanon Sales Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl B. P Bourj Hammoud, Beirut Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Sin El Fil. B. P Beirut Lithuania Sales Alytus UAB rseva Statybininku 16C LT Alytus Luxembourg Assembly Sales Service Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-13 Wavre Malaysia Assembly Sales Service Mexico Assembly Sales Service Johore Quéretaro SEW-EURODRVE SDN BHD No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya 81 Johor Bahru, Johor West Malaysia SEW-EURODRVE MEXCO SA DE CV SEM M93 Tequisquiapan No. 12 Parque ndustrial Quéretaro C.P Quéretaro, México Morocco Sales Casablanca Afit Route D El Jadida KM 14 RP8 Province de Nouaceur Commune Rurale de Bouskoura MA 23 Casablanca 236 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

237 Address List 14 Netherlands Assembly Sales Service New Zealand Assembly Sales Service Norway Assembly Sales Service Rotterdam Auckland Christchurch Moss VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. ndustrieweg 175 NL-344 AS Rotterdam Postbus 185 NL-34 AB Rotterdam SEW-EURODRVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. P.O. Box Greenmount drive East Tamaki Auckland SEW-EURODRVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. 1 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Christchurch SEW-EURODRVE A/S Solgaard skog 71 N-1599 Moss Peru Assembly Sales Service Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES S.A.C. Los Calderos, Urbanizacion ndustrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima Poland Assembly Sales Service Lodz SEW-EURODRVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. ul. Techniczna 5 PL Łódź 24 Hour Service Portugal Assembly Sales Service Coimbra SEW-EURODRVE, LDA. Apartado 15 P Mealhada Romania Sales Service Russia Assembly Sales Service Bucharest St. Petersburg Sialco Trading SRL str. Madrid nr Bucuresti ZAO SEW-EURODRVE P.O. Box St. Petersburg Russia Senegal Sales Dakar SENEMECA Mécanique Générale Km 8, Route de Rufisque B.P. 3251, Dakar Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 237

238 14 Address List Serbia Sales Beograd DPAR d.o.o. Ustanicka 128a PC Košum, V floor SCG-11 Beograd Singapore Assembly Sales Service Singapore SEW-EURODRVE PTE. LTD. No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Jurong ndustrial Estate Singapore Slovakia Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Rybničná 4 SK Bratislava Slovenia Sales Service South Africa Assembly Sales Service Žilina Banská Bystrica Košice Celje Johannesburg Cape Town Durban Nelspruit SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. ndustry Park - PChZ ulica M.R.Štefánika 71 SK-1 1 Žilina SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Rudlovská cesta 85 SK Banská Bystrica SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Slovenská ulica 26 SK-4 1 Košice Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. U. XV. divizije 14 SLO - 3 Celje SEW-EURODRVE (PROPRETARY) LMTED Eurodrive House Cnr. Adcock ngram and Aerodrome Roads Aeroton Ext. 2 Johannesburg 213 P.O.Box 94 Bertsham 213 SEW-EURODRVE (PROPRETARY) LMTED Rainbow Park Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Montague Gardens Cape Town P.O.Box Chempet 7442 Cape Town SEW-EURODRVE (PROPRETARY) LMTED 2 Monaco Place Pinetown Durban P.O. Box 1433, Ashwood 365 SEW-EURODRVE (PTY) LTD. 7 Christie Crescent Vintonia P.O.Box 1942 Nelspruit Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

239 Address List 14 South Korea Assembly Sales Service Spain Assembly Sales Service Ansan-City Busan Bilbao SEW-EURODRVE KOREA CO., LTD. B 61-4, Banweol ndustrial Estate 148-4, Shingil-Dong Ansan SEW-EURODRVE KOREA Co., Ltd. No , Songjeong - dong Gangseo-ku Busan SEW-EURODRVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 32 E-4817 Zamudio (Vizcaya) Sweden Assembly Sales Service Switzerland Assembly Sales Service Jönköping Basel SEW-EURODRVE AB Gnejsvägen 6-8 S-5533 Jönköping Box 31 S-553 Jönköping Alfred lmhof A.G. Jurastrasse 1 CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel Thailand Assembly Sales Service Chonburi SEW-EURODRVE (Thailand) Ltd. 7/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Muang Chonburi 2 Tunisia Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Zone ndustrielle Mghira 2 Lot No Fouchana Turkey Assembly Sales Service Ukraine Sales Service stanbul Dnepropetrovsk SEW-EURODRVE Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti. Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 TR Maltepe STANBUL SEW-EURODRVE Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office Dnepropetrovsk USA Production Assembly Sales Service Corporate Offices Southeast Region SEW-EURODRVE NC Old Spartanburg Highway P.O. Box 518 Lyman, S.C

240 14 Address List USA Assembly Sales Service Northeast Region Midwest Region Southwest Region Western Region SEW-EURODRVE NC. Pureland nd. Complex 217 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 Bridgeport, New Jersey 814 SEW-EURODRVE NC. 21 West Main Street Troy, Ohio SEW-EURODRVE NC. 395 Platinum Way Dallas, Texas SEW-EURODRVE NC San Antonio St. Hayward, CA Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request! Venezuela Assembly Sales Service Valencia SEW-EURODRVE Venezuela S.A. Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon Zona ndustrial Municipal Norte Valencia, Estado Carabobo 24 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

241 ndex ndex A A slave MLK31A Acceleration ramp, P Acceleration ramp, P Active current, P5...96, 172 Additional documentation...9 Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional function Additional functions...6 Setting...59 Adjusting setpoint f2...87, 135 AS-nterface...13 MLK3A...14 MLK31A...14 Topology...14 AS-nterface monitor, P94/P97...1, 176 Automatic adjustment, P , 18 B B slave MLK31A BEM Connection...48 Technical data Binary control...74 Boost, P , 18 Brake Brake disk thickness, min Braking torque Braking torque assignment Work done Working air gap Brake application time, P , 185 Brake coil, technical data Brake disk thickness Brake rectifier BEM Brake release time, P , 185 Brake release without enable...58, 12 Brake release without enable, P , 185 Brake release, activation Brake type Setting...57, 119 Brake type (display), P , 176 Braking resistors external nternal Braking torque assignment Braking torque, brake C Cable cross section...26 Cable glands...19 Communication, check...147, 153 Connection BEM...48 DBG...49 MLU13A...45 MNF21A...46 Motor, overview...43 Motor, when mounted close to the motor...42 MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZSK...39 MOVMOT MM../AND3/AZZK...41 MOVMOT MM../AVSK...37 MOVMOT MM../AZSK...38 MOVMOT MM../AZZK...4 MOVMOT with AS-interface...33 Options...45 PC...5 PE...3 Safety notes...1 URM...47 Control elements, deactivation...149, 156 Control mode...59, 12 Control terminals, activation...27, 28 Controls...53, 116 Cooling type, P , 181 Copyright...7 CTT2 protocol...14 CTT2 services, overview Current limitation, adjustable...61, 62 Current limit, P , 18 D Damp locations

242 ndex Data bits MLK31A Data bits, description DBG Basic display...21 Connection...49 Copy function...29 Description Key assignment Language selection...2 Manual operation mode...24 Parameter mode...22 Parameter setting...86, 134 Part number Transferring the parameter set...89, 137, 29 DBG keypad DC link voltage, P8...96, 172 Deactivating mechanical controls, P , 177 Deceleration ramp, P Deceleration ramp, P Delay time, P , 182 Designated use...8 Diagnostics With status LED...21 Diagnostics interface X DM slot option, P , 175 DP switch setting S1/S2, P , 174 DP switches S1 and S2...54, 116 Disposal Documentation, additional...9 Drive-D module Description Disassembly E Earth-leakage circuit breaker...29 EMC-compliant installation...31 Enable hours, P , 173 Energy-efficiency function, P , 185 Error code, , 176 Error display...21 Error list Error status, P , 173 Exchange request, service Exchange request, service (example) Exclusion of liability...7 Expert mode, activation...148, 154 Extended storage F Factory setting, P , 185 Firmware basic unit, P , 176 Fixed setpoint n, setup...151, 16 Fixed setpoint n...n Frequency, P2...96, 172 Function expansion by setting individual parameters...86, 134 Function module 1hex hex hex hex hex Function modules Functional description MLK31A H Handling Binary control...8 With MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Heat sink temperature, P , 173 Heat sink temperature, readout...152, 164 Hoist application...9, 66, 69 Hoist, VFC operating mode...17, 183 Hybrid cable...43 D object, read out dentification...16 nput contactor...29 nstallation...9 Close to the motor...23 n damp locations...19 nput contactor...29 Mechanical...18 MLU13A...2 MNF21A...21 Notes...19 URM...22 nstallation altitude...31 nstallation close to the motor nstallation dimensions...23 Startup information...81, 189 nstallation instructions...26 nstallation tolerances...18 ntegrating MOVMOT into MOVTOOLS..85, 133 ntegrator ramp Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

243 ndex nterface adapter...5 nverter status, P1...96, 172 xr adjustment, P , 18 L LED...191, 21 Line filter MNF21A Line fuses...26 Lower motor power rating...56, 118 Low-noise operation...57, 119 M Mains off monitoring, P , 182 Mains phase failure monitoring, deactivating...69 Mains phase failure monitoring, P , 182 Manual operation with DBG Activation...24 Deactivation...26 Display...24 Operation...25 Manual operation with MOVTOOLS MotionStudio Activation / deactivation Control Reset Timeout monitoring Manual reset, P , 186 Maximum speed, P , 18 MBG11A Technical data Mechanical installation...18 Minimum frequency Hz...65 Minimum speed, P , 18 MLK3A Description...14 MLK31A A slave B slave Data bits Description...14 Functional description Functional principle Parameter bits Startup MLU13A Connection...45 nstallation...2 Technical data MNF21A Connection...46 nstallation...21 Technical data MotionStudio Manual operation, description Motor Connection type...81, 189 Connection when mounted close to the motor..42 Motor protection...81, 189 Motor cable length, P , 181 Motor overload, response, P , 186 Motor protection...55, 81, 117, 189 Motor protection, P , 181 Motor setpoint speed, P Motor terminal assignment...44 Motor type (display), P1...99, 176 Motor utilization, P6...96, 172 Mounting close to the motor Connection MOVMOT and motor...42 Unit designation...17 MOVLNK parameter channel MOVTOOLS Parameter setting...86, 134 Transferring the parameter set...89, 137 MOVTOOLS Motion Studio...84, 132 N Nameplate AS-nterface option...16 nverter...16 Motor...15 Mounting close to the motor...17 No-load vibration damping...57, 119 No-load vibration damping, P , 181 Nominal frequency (display), P , 176 Nominal frequency (display), P , 176 Nominal power (display), P , 176 Nominal voltage (display), P , 176 O ON hours, P , 173 Operating display Operating mode...59, 12 Operating mode (display), P7...99, 176 Operating mode, P7...17, 183 Operating status, P , 173 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 243

244 ndex Operation Binary control...8 Safety notes...1 with function module 1 hex...13 with function module 3 hex with function module 4hex with function module 5hex with function module 7hex Operation, low-noise...57, 119 Other applicable documentation...9 Output current (value), P4...96, 172 Outputs MOVMOT with AS-nterface...79 P Paint protection cap...51, 52, 83, 113 Paint protection film...51, 52, 83, 113 Parameter bits MLK31A Parameter bits, description Parameter description (MLK31A) Parameter exchange with Exchange request With Write request + Read request Parameter index , , , , , , , , 176 Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter index Parameter list...9 Parameter list (MLK31A) Parameter lock, P , 186 Parameter set transfer using MOVTOOLS.89, 137 Parameter setting...86, 134 Parameter...96, 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 172 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 173 Parameter , 174 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 175 Parameter , 176 Parameter , 176 Parameter , 176 Parameter 94/97...1, 176 Parameter , 177 Parameter , 178 Parameter , 178 Parameter , 179 Parameter , 178 Parameter , 178 Parameter , 179 Parameter , 179 Parameter Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 18 Parameter , 181 Parameter , 181 Parameter , 181 Parameter , 181 Parameter , 181 Parameter , 182 Parameter , 182 Parameter , Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

245 ndex Parameter , 182 Parameter 7 (display)...99, 176 Parameter 7 (setting)...17, 183 Parameter , 184 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 185 Parameter , 186 Parameter , 186 Parameter , 186 Parameter , 186 Parameter , 186 Parameter , 186 Parameters Control functions...16, 17, 182, 183 Depending on controls...111, 187 Display values...96, 172 Motor parameters...14, 18 Setpoints/ramp generators...11, 177 Unit functions...19, 185 PC, connection...5 PE connection...3 Pre-magnetization, P , 18 Protection devices...31 PWM frequency...57, 64, 119 PWM frequency, P , 186 R Ramp at S pattern t12 P , 178 Ramp times...53 Ramp times, extended...61 Ramp t11 down, P , 178 Ramp t11 down, setup...15, 159 Ramp t11 up, P , 178 Ramp t11 up, setup...15, 158 Ramp t12/t22 up = down, P , 178 Rapid start / stop...64 Rated output current, P , 175 Rated voltage...26 Read request, service Read request, service (example) Reading out an D object Replacing MOVMOT Reset, manual, P , 186 Right to claim under limited warranty...7 RS-485 Timeout interval, P , 186 Runtimes for telegrams...14 S S pattern ramp t12, P , 178 S pattern t12, P , 178 Safe disconnection...1 Safety functions...8 Safety notes...8 Electrical connection...1 General...8 nstallation...9 Operation...1 Startup in "Expert" mode with double slave Storage...9 Structure...6 Transportation...9 "Easy" startup...51, 52, 83 Scaling factor factory setting, P Scaling factors, Scaling factor, P Scaling factor, P Service...21, 218 Exchange request Exchange request (example) Read request Read request (example) Write request Write request (example) Services of the CTT2 protocol...14 Setpoint n_f1, P , 179 Setpoint n_f1, P , 179 Setpoint potentiometer f Setpoint stop function, P , 185 Setting output X1, P , 175 Setting setpoint potentiometer f1, P2...98, 175 Setting switch f2, P , 175 Setting switch t1, P , 175 SEW Service Slave address, assignment Slip compensation, deactivated...73 Slip compensation, P , 181 Speed monitoring...59, 12 Speed monitoring, extended...69 Speed monitoring, P5...16, 182 Speed, P...96, 172 Standstill current, P , 184 Start offset, P , 185 Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor 245

246 ndex Start / Stop speed, P3...14, 18 Startup Adding functions by setting individual parameters...86, 134 By transferring the parameter set By transferring the set of parameters...89 Note for installation close to the motor...81, 189 Transferring individual parameters with binary control...74 with MLK31A option "Easy"...52 "Expert"...83 "Expert" with double slave Startup mode, P , 173 Startup mode, P , 186 Status display...21 Stop ramp t13, P , 179 Stop setpoint, P , 185 Storage...9 Structure of the safety notes...6 Supply system leads...26 Switch f Switch S5 MOVMOT with AS-nterface...78, 124 Switch t T Target group...8 Technical Data MOVMOT 4 V / 5 Hz or 4 V / 1 Hz..22 MOVMOT 46 V / 6 Hz Options Telegram run times...14 Terminals, activation...27, 28 Tightening torque for MOVMOT terminals...25 Tightening torques...24 Timeout monitoring Topology AS-nterface...14 Torque, reduced...68 Transferring individual parameters Transferring the parameter set Transferring the parameter set using MOVTOOLS...89, 137 Transferring the parameter set (with DBG)...29 Transportation...9 Type of AS-nterface option, P , 176 U UL-compliant installation MOVMOT with AS-nterface...32 Unit designation nverter...16 Motor...15 Mounting close to the motor...17 Unit identification...16 Unit replacement Unit structure...11 Unit type, P7...99, 175 URM Connection...47 nstallation...22 Technical data USB11A...5 UWS21B...5 V Voltage relay URM W Work done, brake Working air gap, brake Write request, service Write request, service (example) hex V supply, setup hex hex hex hex Operating nstructions MOVMOT MM..D with AS-nterface and DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

247

248 SEW-EURODRVE Driving the world SEW-EURODRVE Driving the world

Compact Operating Instructions

Compact Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Compact Operating Instructions MOVIMOT MM..D with AS-Interface and AC Motor DRS/DRE/ Edition 04/2010 16951611/ EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Quick Start Guide. MOVIMOT MM..D With DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Quick Start Guide. MOVIMOT MM..D With DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Quick Start Guide MOVIMOT MM..D With DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor Edition 02/2013 20099347 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world General information

More information

Operating Instructions. MOVIMOT MM..D With AC Motor DRS/DRE/DRP. Edition 12/ / EN

Operating Instructions. MOVIMOT MM..D With AC Motor DRS/DRE/DRP. Edition 12/ / EN Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services MOVIMOT MM..D With AC Motor DRS/DRE/DRP Edition 12/27 1167512 / EN Operating Instructions SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Operating Instructions MOVIMOT MM..D With DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor Edition 12/21 1717 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22167811_0416* Operating Instructions Decentralized Drive Systems MOVIMOT MM..D with AS-Interface Edition 04/2016 22167811/EN SEW-EURODRIVE

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Gearmotors \ Industrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ Services MOVIMOT MM..C Edition 11/26 1144141 / EN Operating Instructions SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents 1 General Notes...

More information

Compact Operating Instructions

Compact Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Compact Operating Instructions MOVIMOT MM..D With DRS/DRE/DRP AC Motor Edition 01/2011 17068428 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Control Cabinet Inverter MOVITRAC B Functional Safety

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Control Cabinet Inverter MOVITRAC B Functional Safety Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual Control Cabinet Inverter MOVITRAC B Functional Safety Edition 05/2009 16811216 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Content Content

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Gearmotors \ ndustrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ Services MOVTRAC B Keypad Edition 2/27 11586214 / EN Operating nstructions SEW-EURODRVE Driving the world Contents 1 mportant

More information

Addendum to the Operating Instructions

Addendum to the Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Addendum to the Operating Instructions Special Design MOVIFIT FC MTF...-25 Motor Assignment via DIP Switches Edition 10/2010 17034426

More information

Operating instructions

Operating instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *21216592_0414* Operating instructions SNI I/O System Edition 04/2014 21216592 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents

More information

SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual

SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual About These Instructions This documentation applies to the optional Additional I/O module for the SMVector inverter and should be used in

More information

Compact Operating Instructions

Compact Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *21326592_1014* Compact Operating Instructions Decentralized Drive Systems MOVIMOT MM..D Edition 10/2014 21326592/EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Gearmotors \ Industrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ Services MOVIFIT FC Edition 02/2007 11574216 / EN Operating Instructions SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents 1 General Information...

More information

Operating instructions. Standstill monitor A / / 2011

Operating instructions. Standstill monitor A / / 2011 Operating instructions Standstill monitor A300 UK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7390337 / 01 02 / 2011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 switchpoint min max pulse/min power Made in Germany ifm electronic gmbh D 45127 Essen func. I II

More information

Operating instructions. Speed monitor D / / 2014

Operating instructions. Speed monitor D / / 2014 Operating instructions Speed monitor D200 80005257 / 00 05 / 2014 Contents 1 Preliminary note...4 1.1 Symbols used...4 1.2 Warning signs used...4 2 Safety instructions...5 2.1 General...5 2.2 Target group...5

More information

Operating instructions. Switching amplifier DN0210 DN / / 2015

Operating instructions. Switching amplifier DN0210 DN / / 2015 Operating instructions Switching amplifier DN0210 DN0220 UK 80011079 / 00 01 / 2015 Contents 1 Preliminary note...4 1.1 Symbols used...4 1.2 Warning signs used...4 2 Safety instructions...5 2.1 General...5

More information

Compact Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation EtherNet/IP Interfaces, Field Distributors * _1115*

Compact Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation EtherNet/IP Interfaces, Field Distributors * _1115* Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22511466_1115* Compact Manual Drive System for Decentralized Installation EtherNet/IP Interfaces, Field Distributors Edition 11/2015

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Electronic Motor DRC Functional Safety

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Electronic Motor DRC Functional Safety Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual Electronic Motor DRC Functional Safety Edition 02/2012 19376812 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General

More information

QUICK START GUIDE. vau4/3. Frequency converter. operating instructions /12

QUICK START GUIDE. vau4/3. Frequency converter.   operating instructions /12 operating instructions QUICK START GUIDE Frequency converter vau4/3 28100241101 12/12 1 Safety information Warning of electrical shock! Danger to life! Electrical shock can cause serious injury or even

More information

Operating instructions AS-i SmartLine module AC3200 AC /00 06/2016

Operating instructions AS-i SmartLine module AC3200 AC /00 06/2016 Operating instructions AS-i SmartLine module AC3200 AC3201 80237876/00 06/2016 Contents 1 Preliminary note...3 1.1 Symbols used...3 1.2 Warnings used...3 2 Safety instructions...3 2.1 General...3 2.2 Target

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ s Operating Instructions MOVI-SWITCH 1EM SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General Information... 5 1.1 Use of this documentation...

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVITRAC MC07B Functional Safety

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVITRAC MC07B Functional Safety Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual MOVITRAC Functional Safety Edition 12/2011 19396414 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General Information...

More information

SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual

SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual SMVector Additional I/O Module Installation and Operation Manual About These Instructions This documentation applies to the optional Additional I/O module for the SMVector inverter and should be used in

More information

HITACHI. EH-150 series PLC EH-RTD8 Resistance Temperature Detective input module Instruction manual. Safety precautions

HITACHI. EH-150 series PLC EH-RTD8 Resistance Temperature Detective input module Instruction manual. Safety precautions HITACHI EH-150 series PLC Resistance Temperature Detective input module Instruction manual Thank you for purchasing a Hitachi Programmable Logic Controller. To operate it safely, please read this instruction

More information

Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors P R O F B U S. Edition 11/ / EN

Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors P R O F B U S. Edition 11/ / EN Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services P R O F I PROCESS FIELD BUS B U S Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors Edition 11/2008

More information

8 Electrical Installation

8 Electrical Installation MOVIMOT Installation Guidelines Electrical Installation. MOVIMOT Installation Guidelines Connect Power Supply Lines The nominal voltage and frequency of MOVIMOT must correspond to the data for the supply

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVITRAC MC07B Functional Safety

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVITRAC MC07B Functional Safety Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual MOVITRAC MC07B Functional Safety Edition 12/2011 19396414 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General Information...

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Operating Instructions MOVIDRIVE MDX60B / 61B Edition 01/2010 16837614 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General

More information

Operating instructions Evaluation system for flow sensors VS / / 2013

Operating instructions Evaluation system for flow sensors VS / / 2013 Operating instructions Evaluation system for flow sensors VS3000 7097 / 0 07 / 203 Contents Preliminary note...2 2 Safety instructions...3 3 Function and features... Mounting.... Mounting of the sensors...

More information

Manual. MOVIDRIVE MDX60B / 61B Crane Control Application. Edition 01/ / EN

Manual. MOVIDRIVE MDX60B / 61B Crane Control Application. Edition 01/ / EN Gearmotors \ Industrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ s MOVIDRIVE MDX60B / 61B Crane Control Application Edition 01/2007 11537817 / EN Manual SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents

More information

Installation manual plugs and connectors with screw connection (16/32 A)

Installation manual plugs and connectors with screw connection (16/32 A) EN Installation manual plugs and connectors with screw connection (16/32 60003213 Issue 04.2016 2016-04-01 Table of contents 1 About this manual 3 1.1 Structure of the warnings 3 1.2 Symbols used 4 1.3

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ s *21293007_0215* Operating Instructions Drive Power Solution MOVI-DPS Energy and Power Interface EKK-A-...-I06-500-0-0/E.. Edition 02/2015 21293007/EN

More information

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7 SERIES STATIC GENERATORS

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7 SERIES STATIC GENERATORS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7 SERIES STATIC GENERATORS GB Contents Page 1 Introduction 4 2 Safety 5 3 Use 6 4 Checking on Delivered Equipment 6 5 General Specification and Dimensions 7 6 Positioning 10 7 Operating

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. CCU Universal Module Application Module

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. CCU Universal Module Application Module Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual CCU Universal Module Application Module Edition 05/2011 17061210 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General

More information

Addendum to the Operating Instructions

Addendum to the Operating Instructions Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Addendum to the Operating Instructions Special Design MOVIFIT FC MTF...-25 Motor Assignment via DIP Edition 09/2013 19490410 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE

More information

JULIET-PK. Joystick station

JULIET-PK. Joystick station Joystick station JULIET-PK Handy and compact joystick station. Juliet PK is a user-friendly, ergonomic product, whose size and shape are the result of careful analysis of the aspects linked to daily use

More information

Operating Instructions (Translation) 3. Safety Information. 1. Description. 2. Explosion Protection. Supply module Type 17-21BB-170x

Operating Instructions (Translation) 3. Safety Information. 1. Description. 2. Explosion Protection. Supply module Type 17-21BB-170x 1. Description The supply module was developed specially for direct mounting in hazardous areas in Zone 1 and 21 and is ATEX-certified. The supply module is a permanently installed piece of electrical

More information

Edition MOVI-SWITCH 08/2003. Operating Instructions / EN

Edition MOVI-SWITCH 08/2003. Operating Instructions / EN MOVI-SWITCH Edition 08/200 Operating Instructions 11210915 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Contents 1 Important Notes... 2 MOVI-SWITCH Safety Notes... 5 Unit Design... 6.1 MOVI-SWITCH 1E... 6.2 MOVI-SWITCH 2S... 7.

More information

Industriefunkuhren. Technical Manual. Signal Converter. for DIN Rail Mounting Series 4800xx-yy ENGLISH

Industriefunkuhren. Technical Manual. Signal Converter. for DIN Rail Mounting Series 4800xx-yy ENGLISH Industriefunkuhren Technical Manual Signal Converter for DIN Rail Mounting Series 4800xx-yy ENGLISH Version: 01.01-19.07.2007 2 / 23 Signal Converter 4800 - V01.01 INPORTANT NOTES Downloading Technical

More information

* _1216* Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Electronic Motor DRC..

* _1216* Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. Electronic Motor DRC.. Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22745866_1216* Manual Electronic Motor DRC.. Functional Safety Edition 12/2016 22745866/EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions TPS S1 AC in DC out Translation of the original instructions TPS 110-400 Mains pack Operating Instructions PT 0199 BEN/C (1010) EN Table of contents Table of contents 1 About this manual...............................................

More information

Control unit SG-EFS 104/4L. EN Operating instructions. Innovative by tradition. Version SG-EFS 104/4L AC/DC 24 V

Control unit SG-EFS 104/4L. EN Operating instructions. Innovative by tradition. Version SG-EFS 104/4L AC/DC 24 V Innovative by tradition. Control unit SG-EFS 104/4L EN Operating instructions Version 2 1004128 SG-EFS 104/4L AC/DC 24 V Original instructions Mayser GmbH & Co. KG Örlinger Straße 1 3 89073 Ulm GERMANY

More information

Operating Instructions MOVITRAC LTE-B

Operating Instructions MOVITRAC LTE-B Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ s Operating Instructions MOVITRAC LTE-B Edition 11/2012 20045344 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world Contents Contents 1 General information...

More information

CPCI-PS24 24V-Power Supply

CPCI-PS24 24V-Power Supply 24V-Power Supply Hardware Manual to Product I.2301.21 esd electronic system design gmbh Vahrenwalder Str. 207 30165 Hannover Germany http://www.esd.eu Phone: +49 (0) 511 3 72 98-0 Fax: +49 (0) 511 3 72

More information

Manual. Decentralized Drive Control MOVIFIT FDC-SNI Connection to PROFIBUS/DeviceNet with UFF41B Fieldbus Gateway

Manual. Decentralized Drive Control MOVIFIT FDC-SNI Connection to PROFIBUS/DeviceNet with UFF41B Fieldbus Gateway Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual Decentralized Drive Control MOVIFIT FDC-SNI Connection to PROFIBUS/DeviceNet with UFF4B Fieldbus Gateway Edition 0/0 950 / EN

More information

RAD-DO8-IFS. I/O extension module, eight digital transistor outputs. Data sheet. 1 Description

RAD-DO8-IFS. I/O extension module, eight digital transistor outputs. Data sheet. 1 Description I/O extension module, eight digital transistor outputs Data sheet 105364_en_00 PHOENIX CONTACT 2013-03-26 1 Description The I/O extension module can be used in conjunction with Radioline wireless modules

More information

Operation Manual Series W-500

Operation Manual Series W-500 Operation Manual Series W-500 Table of Content 1 Safety information... 2 1.1 Place of application of the unit... 2 1.2 Instructions for installation... 3 2 Start-up and adjustment of controller 4 3 General

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Gearmotors \ Industrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ Services Explosion-Proof MOVIMOT Drives in Category 3D GC310000 Edition 12/2005 11407026 / EN Operating Instructions SEW-EURODRIVE

More information

PHOENIX CONTACT - 12/2007

PHOENIX CONTACT - 12/2007 Ex-i NAMUR Isolation Amplifier, With Intrinsically Safe Input and Active Transistor Output, Two-Channel INTERFACE Data Sheet 0943_00_en PHOENIX CONTACT - /007 Description The PI-EX-ME-NAM/TO-A is a two-channel

More information

PI-EX-ME-2NAM/COC-120VAC

PI-EX-ME-2NAM/COC-120VAC PI-EX-ME-NAM/COC-0VAC Ex-i NAMUR Isolation Amplifier, With Intrinsically Safe Input and Relay Output, PDT, Two-Channel, 0 V AC Supply INTERFACE Data Sheet 0944_00_en PHOENIX CONTACT - 0/008 Description

More information

Operating Manual -ENGLISH- Page 1 KWG-ISO

Operating Manual -ENGLISH- Page 1 KWG-ISO Page 1 KWG-ISO Operating manual English- Status May 2013 Page 2 Manufacturer address KW-Generator GmbH & Co.KG Bänglesäcker 24 73527 Schwäbisch-Gmünd / Lindach Phone: +49 (0) 7171 104 17 0 Fax: +49 (0)

More information

Explosion-Protected Arc-Fault Protection ExAFCI Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter

Explosion-Protected Arc-Fault Protection ExAFCI Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Installation, Operation & Maintenance Sheet Explosion-Protected Arc-Fault Protection ExAFCI Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter > Contents 1 Contents 1 Contents...2 2 General Information...2 2.1 Manufacturer...2

More information

PI-EX-ME-2NAM/COC-24VDC

PI-EX-ME-2NAM/COC-24VDC Ex-i NAMUR Isolation Amplifier, With Intrinsically Safe Input and Relay Output, PDT, Two-Channel, 4 V DC Supply INTERFACE Data Sheet 0033_0_en PHOENIX CONTACT - /007 Description The PI-EX-ME-NAM/COC-4VDC

More information

SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing. Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006

SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing. Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006 s SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006 Table of Contents Table of Contents... 2 Warning and Safety Terms... 3 General... 4 1 Technical Description... 5 1.1 Area of Application...

More information

High Power Electronic Gear Installation and operation Guide

High Power Electronic Gear Installation and operation Guide High Power Electronic Gear Installation and operation Guide 96268731 GT 1 KW 230-240 V HQITS-S DGE CLI WI SC 96267936 GT 2 KW 230-240 V HO/HF DGE CLI WI SC IP21 IP21 electronical gear for 1 and 2 kw HIT-DE

More information

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output Driver LC 69W 35-5mA flexc lp ANCED series Product description Built-in constant current LED Driver New version DC operating with EL marking Adjustable output current between 35 and 5 ma Max. output power

More information

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output Driver LC 7W 5-35mA flexc lp ANCED series Product description Built-in constant current LED Driver New version DC operating with EL marking Adjustable output current between 5 and 35 ma Max. output power

More information

Revision. Decentralized Drive Systems MOVIMOT MM..D with AS-Interface * _0817*

Revision. Decentralized Drive Systems MOVIMOT MM..D with AS-Interface * _0817* Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *23583657_0817* Revision Decentralized Drive Systems MOVIMOT MM..D with AS-Interface Edition 08/2017 23583657/EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving

More information

Electromotoric actuators Torques up to 60 Nm Running times ¹) s. ¹) Predefined by the basic unit (LMV5...)

Electromotoric actuators Torques up to 60 Nm Running times ¹) s. ¹) Predefined by the basic unit (LMV5...) 7 818 Actuators SQM9... Electromotoric actuators Torques up to 60 Nm Running times ¹) 30...120 s ¹) Predefined by the basic unit (LMV5...) The SQM9... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which

More information

Digital ac/dc (24V) Input Module

Digital ac/dc (24V) Input Module Installation Instructions Digital ac/dc (24V) Input Module Catalog Number 1771-IND, Series C Topic Page Important User Information 2 Before You Begin 3 Power Requirements 3 Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

More information

MDM 011-Z1 Regen Resistor

MDM 011-Z1 Regen Resistor MDM 011-Z1 Regen Resistor Date of creation: 10.04.2017 Version date: 10.04.2017 Article number: 09-402-011-Z1-E Publisher: SIGMATEK GmbH & Co KG A-5112 Lamprechtshausen Tel.: 06274/4321 Fax: 06274/4321-18

More information

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVIAXIS Multi-Axis Servo Inverter MXR Regenerative Power Module

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services. Manual. MOVIAXIS Multi-Axis Servo Inverter MXR Regenerative Power Module Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services Manual MOVIAXIS Multi-Axis Servo Inverter MXR Regenerative Power Module Edition 07/2009 16782011 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world

More information

PTB 01 ATEX 2064 U, IECEx PTB U. Example / Beispiel / Exemple: Type Operating Instructions

PTB 01 ATEX 2064 U, IECEx PTB U. Example / Beispiel / Exemple: Type Operating Instructions , Equipment protection fuse with Ex mb II C Gb approval Geräteschutzsicherung mit Zulassung Ex mb II C Gb Fusible de protection d appareil avec homologation Ex mb II C Gb Example / Beispiel / Exemple:

More information

SINUS PENTA 6. ACCESSORIES 6.1. BRAKING RESISTORS APPLICATION TABLES 111/209

SINUS PENTA 6. ACCESSORIES 6.1. BRAKING RESISTORS APPLICATION TABLES 111/209 INSTALLATION. ACCESSORIES.. BRAKING RESISTORS... APPLICATION TABLES From size S to size S, inverters are supplied with a built-in braking module. The braking resistor is to be connected outside the inverter

More information

LXM32SD18M2 motion servo drive - Lexium 32-single phase supply voltage 115/230V - 0.5/1.kW

LXM32SD18M2 motion servo drive - Lexium 32-single phase supply voltage 115/230V - 0.5/1.kW Product data sheet Characteristics LXM32SD18M2 motion servo drive - Lexium 32-single phase supply voltage 115/230V - 0.5/1.kW Main Range of product Lexium 32 Product or component type Device short name

More information

SolConeX Wall-Mounted Socket, 16 A

SolConeX Wall-Mounted Socket, 16 A SolConeX Wall-Mounted Socket, 16 A Operating instructions Additional languages www.stahl-ex.com General Information Contents 1 General Information...2 1.1 Manufacturer...2 1.2 Information Regarding the

More information

Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors. Edition 07/2006 P R O F I B U S FC / EN

Manual. Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors. Edition 07/2006 P R O F I B U S FC / EN Gearmotors \ Industrial Gear Units \ Drive Electronics \ Drive Automation \ Services P R O F I PROCESS FIELD BUS B U S Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces, Field Distributors

More information

RTU500 series Data Sheet Power Supply CP-E 24/2.5

RTU500 series Data Sheet Power Supply CP-E 24/2.5 Data Sheet Power Supply CP-E 24/2.5 Power Supply CP-E 24/2.5 Application The primary switch mode power supply offers two voltage input ranges. This enables the supply with AC or DC. Furthermore it is equipped

More information

Instruction Manual for 1-Phase 1Q-Power Controller Temvar GE_3

Instruction Manual for 1-Phase 1Q-Power Controller Temvar GE_3 Instruction Manual for 1-Phase 1Q-Power Controller TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 SAFETY AND APPLICATION NOTES FOR DRIVE CONVERTERS... 2 2 DEVICE DESCRIPTION... 3 2.1 General... 3 2.2 Device Construction... 3 2.3

More information

ATV32HU11M2437 variable speed drive ATV32-1.1kW 200V - 1P - Bluetooth built-in - w heat sink

ATV32HU11M2437 variable speed drive ATV32-1.1kW 200V - 1P - Bluetooth built-in - w heat sink Characteristics variable speed drive ATV32-1.1kW 200V - 1P - Bluetooth built-in - w heat sink Main Range of product Altivar 32 Product or component type Product destination Product specific application

More information

Analog Monitor Installation Manual

Analog Monitor Installation Manual Analog Monitor Installation Manual Part Number: 144-23919 Copyright 2011 Magnetek 1. Preface and Safety Magnetek manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment.

More information

TPE, TPED Series 2000

TPE, TPED Series 2000 GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS TPE, TPED Series 2000 Installation and operating instructions English (GB) English (GB) Installation and operating instructions Original installation and operating instructions. CONTENTS

More information

SolConeX extra-low voltage flange socket

SolConeX extra-low voltage flange socket SolConeX extra-low voltage flange socket Operating instructions Additional languages www.stahl-ex.com Contents 1 General Information...3 1.1 Manufacturer...3 1.2 Information regarding the operating instructions...3

More information

Juliet - PK. Joystick station. business partner. Features. Design. Materials. Industrial lifting. Construction lifting.

Juliet - PK. Joystick station. business partner. Features. Design. Materials. Industrial lifting. Construction lifting. Juliet - PK Joystick station Juliet-PK joystick stations are control devices for all industrial machinery. They operate as auxiliary controllers of electrical motors through a power interface, such as

More information

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation 4

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation 4 Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical specifications 5 Operating Instructions Control version V4.6 11/2013 A5E32845290B AA

More information

MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version

MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version USER/MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1 SLOT 0 SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5 SLOT 6 SLOT 7 SLOT 8 SLOT 9 SLOT 10 SLOT 11 EB-2 (a) MC11 (b) (c) Figures

More information

Conductive Level Controller

Conductive Level Controller Conductive Level Controller 61F-D21T-V1 Ideal for level control for industrial facilities and equipment. Outputs can be set to self-hold at ON or OFF using self-holding circuits. Sensitivity adjustment

More information

7KM2112-0BA00-3AA0 SENTRON PAC3200. English. Operating Instructions DANGER CAUTION DANGER. Order-No.: A5E Last update: 18 January 2008

7KM2112-0BA00-3AA0 SENTRON PAC3200. English. Operating Instructions DANGER CAUTION DANGER. Order-No.: A5E Last update: 18 January 2008 SENTRON PAC3200 Operating Instructions Read and understand these instructions and the relevant manual before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment. CAUTION DANGER Hazardous voltage. Will

More information

RAD-DI8-IFS. I/O extension module with 8 digital inputs or 2 pulse inputs. INTERFACE Data sheet. 1 Description

RAD-DI8-IFS. I/O extension module with 8 digital inputs or 2 pulse inputs. INTERFACE Data sheet. 1 Description I/O extension module with 8 digital inputs or 2 pulse inputs INTERFACE Data sheet 0483_en_00 PHOENIX CONTACT 203-04-05 Description The I/O extension module can be used in conjunction with Radioline wireless

More information

Siemens Industrial s

Siemens Industrial s SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions 05/2010 SINAMICS Siemens Industrial s Sinusoidal filter Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical

More information

Original operating instructions Fail-safe inductive sensor GI711S / / 2010

Original operating instructions Fail-safe inductive sensor GI711S / / 2010 Original operating instructions Fail-safe inductive sensor GI7S 704583 / 0 06 / 200 Contents Preliminary note 3. Explanation of symbols 3 2 Safety instructions 4 2. Safety-related requirements regarding

More information

dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Safety information 1 General 2

dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Safety information 1 General 2 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Operating Instructions Safety information 1 General 2 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical

More information

PTB 01 ATEX Example / Beispiel / Exemple. Type Operating Instructions

PTB 01 ATEX Example / Beispiel / Exemple. Type Operating Instructions Device with II 2G EX i approval Geräte mit II 2G EX i Zulassung Appareils avec mode de protection II 2G EX i Example / Beispiel / Exemple Type 6106 Operating Instructions Bedienungsanleitung Manuel d utilisation

More information

Revision. Drive and Application Controller MOVIPRO PHC2.A-A..M1-..2A-C5 * _1117*

Revision. Drive and Application Controller MOVIPRO PHC2.A-A..M1-..2A-C5 * _1117* Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22880852_7* Revision Drive and Application Controller MOVIPRO PHC2.A-A..M-..2A-C5 Edition /207 22880852/EN SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the

More information

STR-3 STANDARD 3-PHASE 230 VAC TRANSFORMER CONTROLLER. Mounting and operating instructions

STR-3 STANDARD 3-PHASE 230 VAC TRANSFORMER CONTROLLER. Mounting and operating instructions STANDARD 3-PHASE 230 VAC TRANSFORMER CONTROLLER Mounting and operating instructions Table of contents SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS 3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 4 ARTICLE CODES 4 INTENDED AREA OF USE 4 TECHNICAL DATA

More information

Operating instructions for built-in fans with three-phase powered motors, sizes 112 and 150

Operating instructions for built-in fans with three-phase powered motors, sizes 112 and 150 Operating instructions for built-in fans with three-phase powered motors, sizes 112 and 150 The device type, date of manufacture (calendar week/year) and the conformity sign are located on the type plate

More information

Operating instructions Safe AS-i input module ASIM-C-M About this document. Content

Operating instructions Safe AS-i input module ASIM-C-M About this document. Content 7 Set-up and maintenance 7.1 Functional testing....10 7.2 Maintenance...10 EN Operating instructions.............pages 1 to 6 Original 8 Disassembly and disposal 8.1 Disassembly....10 8.2 Disposal...10

More information

Rhino Buffer Module PSM24-BFM600S. Operating Instructions

Rhino Buffer Module PSM24-BFM600S. Operating Instructions Rhino Buffer Module PSM24-BFM600S Operating Instructions RHINO BUFFER MODULE PSM24-BFM600S Description The PSM24-BFM600S Buffer Module will hold the output voltage of a 24 VDC power supply after brownouts

More information

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output Driver C 9W 5-35mA flexc lp ACED series Product description Built-in constant current ED Driver Adjustable output current between 5 and 35 ma Max. output power 9 W Up to 84 % efficiency ominal life-time

More information

Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces and Field Distributors

Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces and Field Distributors Drive System for Decentralized Installation PROFIBUS Interfaces and Field Distributors Edition 04/2003 P R O F I PROCESS FIELD BUS B U S Manual 10564516 / EN SEW-EURODRIVE Contents 1 Valid Components...

More information

STEP-PS/1AC/24DC/1.75

STEP-PS/1AC/24DC/1.75 Primary-switched power supply, 1 AC, output current 1.75 A INTERFACE Data Sheet 103506_en_00 1 Description PHOENIX CONTACT - 05/2008 Features STEP POWER power supply units for building automation The new

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Key Adapter CKS-K-AS2A-U-C20-PC (Unicode) EN Contents 1. About this document... 3 1.1. Scope...3 1.2. Target group...3 1.3. Key to symbols...3 1.4. Supplementary documents...3 2. Correct use... 4 3. Description

More information

MINI-PS AC/10-15DC/8

MINI-PS AC/10-15DC/8 Primary-Switched Power Supply, Narrow Design Data Sheet 08/2004 MINI POWER provides: An extra narrow design, with widths of 22.5 mm, 45 mm, and 67.5 mm (0.886, 1.772, and 2.657 in.) Global use due to a

More information

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output

LED Driver Linear / area fixed output Driver C 57W 8-5mA flexc lp ACED series Product description Built-in constant current ED Driver ew version DC operating with E marking Adjustable output current between 8 and,5 ma Max. output power 57

More information

PHOENIX CONTACT - 08/2009. Features. DANGER OF EXPLOSION! Only remove equipment when it is disconnected and not in the potentially explosive area.

PHOENIX CONTACT - 08/2009. Features. DANGER OF EXPLOSION! Only remove equipment when it is disconnected and not in the potentially explosive area. Primary-switched power supply for building automation INTERFACE Data sheet 103505_en_02 1 Description PHOENIX CONTACT - 08/2009 Features STEP POWER power supply units for building automation The new STEP

More information

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G130 Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G130 Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical specifications 5 Operating Instructions Control version V4.7 04/2014 A5E00331462A Legal

More information

ATV12HU22M3 variable speed drive ATV12-2.2kW - 3hp V - 3ph - with heat sink

ATV12HU22M3 variable speed drive ATV12-2.2kW - 3hp V - 3ph - with heat sink Characteristics variable speed drive ATV12-2.2kW - 3hp - 200..240V - 3ph - with heat sink Main Range of product Altivar 12 Product or component type Product destination Product specific application Assembly

More information

H Series PLC. ! : Indicates Compulsion. EH-150 Analog input module EH-AXH8M Instruction manual. Safety precautions DANGER CAUTION COMPULSION

H Series PLC. ! : Indicates Compulsion. EH-150 Analog input module EH-AXH8M Instruction manual. Safety precautions DANGER CAUTION COMPULSION H Series PLC EH-150 Analog input module EH-AXH8M Instruction manual Thank you for purchasing a Hitachi Programmable Logic Controller. To operate it safely, please read this instruction manual and all the

More information

Bulletin 290/291 ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers Specifications

Bulletin 290/291 ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers Specifications Power Circuit Control Circuit (External Source) Control Circuit (Internal Source) Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) Application Electrical Ratings Three-phase Number of Poles 3 Input Power Terminals

More information